The BMW 4 Series Coupe.: Owner'S Manual

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW 4 SERIES COUPE.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 409 - VI/16

4 Series Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 VI/16, 07 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 192 Refueling
page 250. 194 Fuel
196 Wheels and tires
212 Engine compartment
6 Information
214 Engine oil
At a glance 218 Coolant
14 Cockpit 220 Maintenance
18 iDrive 222 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 231 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 238 Care
Controls Reference
34 Opening and closing 246 Technical data
50 Settings 249 Appendix
61 Transporting children safely 250 Everything from A to Z
65 Driving
80 Displays
96 Lights
101 Safety
124 Driving stability control systems
130 Driving comfort
152 Climate control
159 Interior equipment
168 Storage compartments
Driving tips
176 Things to remember when driving
179 Loading
182 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Dealer’s service center
ular topic is by using the index. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in additional questions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Updates made after the editorial Owner's Manual and general information about
deadline BMW, such as about the technology, in the In‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ ternet: www.bmwusa.com.
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ BMW Driver’s Guide App
uals:
The Owner's Manual is available
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. in many countries as an app. Ad‐
▷ Online Owner's Manual. ditional information on the Inter‐
net:
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Symbols and displays

Entertainment, Communication
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as Indicates precautions that must be followed
printed book from the service center. precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
vehicle.
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals: ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
on the Control Display. Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
6
Information
Action steps Status of the Owner's

Action steps to be carried out are presented as Manual
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order. Basic information
1. First action step. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
2. Second action step. policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
Enumerations
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
ternative possibilities are presented as list with those in your vehicle.
bullet points.
▷ First possibility. Updates made after the editorial
▷ Second possibility. deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
Symbols on vehicle components ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
Indicates that you should consult the er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for uals:
information on a particular part or assembly. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and options
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
This Owner's Manual describes all models and dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
all standard, country-specific and optional cle.
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
Own safety
not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of
the selected optional features or the country-
Intended use
specific version.
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. ▷ Owner's Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
applicable country provisions must be ob‐ stickers.
served. ▷ Technical vehicle data.
For any options and equipment not described ▷ The laws and safety standards applicable
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐ in the country, where the vehicle is driven.
mentary Owner's Manuals. ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐ ments.
ments are arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations. Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
7
Information
ments applying in the country of first delivery, approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is whether these products are suitable for BMW
to be operated in a different country it might be vehicles under all usage conditions.
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐ California Proposition 65 Warning
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply California laws require us to state the following
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ warning:
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
formation on warranty is available from a
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
dealer’s service center.
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
Maintenance and repairs
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
materials and high-performance electronics, products of component wear contain or emit
requires suitable maintenance and repair work. chemicals known to the State of California to
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
that you entrust corresponding procedures to ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐ pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
maintenance and repair, according to BMW cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
specifications with properly trained personnel, your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another water.
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work, e.g., maintenance and repair, is per‐ Service and warranty
formed improperly, there is a risk of subse‐ We recommend that you read this publication
quent damage and related safety risks. thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
Parts and accessories ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐ ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
cessory products approved by BMW.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
Approved parts and accessories, and advice ranty.
on their use and installation are available from
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
a BMW dealer's service center.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
ited Warranty.
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles. Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
sories.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
ual product from another manufacturer can be
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
ditions and homologation requirements in your
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
country and continental region in order to de‐
8
Information
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
is operated under those conditions. If you wish tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating gagement of the stability control systems.
conditions and homologation requirements.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such This data is purely technical in nature and is
country or region. In such case, please contact used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
Customer Relations for further information. mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
Maintenance data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
road safety, operational reliability and the New
mation can be read out from the event and
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ service center or another qualified service cen‐
ures: ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
▷ BMW Maintenance system using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet further information there if you need it. After an
for US models error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
ous basis.
Canadian models
With the vehicle in use there are situations
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
where you can associate this technical data
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
Warranty.
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer — such as vehicle
Data memory emergency locating — allow certain vehicle
Many electronic components on your vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events Event Data Recorder EDR
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
system or the environment: corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
▷ Operating states of system components,
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
e.g., fill levels.
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ The EDR is designed to record data related to
tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration, vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
transverse acceleration.
9
Information
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or Vehicle identification

less.
number
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐ The vehicle identification number can be found
standing of the circumstances in which in the engine compartment.
crashes and injuries occur. The vehicle identification number can also be
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a found behind the windshield.
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, Reporting safety defects
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ For US customers
ment, could combine the EDR data with the The following only applies to vehicles owned
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ and operated in the US.
quired during a crash investigation.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
To read data recorded by an EDR, special which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
enforcement, that have the special equipment, North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
can read the information if they have access to wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
the vehicle or the EDR. 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
10
Information
formation about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
11
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. Moreover, you will become familiar with
the available control concepts and options
quickly.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions.
This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and
specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable country provisions
series. It also describes features that are not must be observed.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
Functions and controls in the cockpit
1 Roller sunblind for rear window 47 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

2 Power windows 46 tion 121
3 Exterior mirror operation 58 Intelligent Safety 111

4 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 169
Lane departure warning 119
Driver assistance systems
5 Lights
14
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lights 99 Cruise control: resume speed
Light switch 96 Active Cruise Control: reduce

distance
Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase

Daytime running lights 98 distance
Parking lights 96 Cruise control rocker switch
8 Instrument cluster 80
Low beams 96 9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
Automatic headlamp con‐ er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
trol 97 tainment and Communication 6
Adaptive Light Control 98 Volume, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and
High-beam Assistant 98
Communication 6
Instrument lighting 100
Voice activation 26
6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual

Turn signal 70 for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 89
High beams, head‐
light flasher 70 10 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 71
High-beam Assistant 98
Rain sensor 72
Roadside parking lights 97
Clean the windshield and head‐

Onboard computer 90
lights 72
11 Start/stop the engine and switch

7 Steering wheel buttons, left
the ignition on/off 66
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 135 Auto Start/Stop function 67
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

terrupt 130 12 Horn, entire surface
Cruise control: store speed
15
At a glance Cockpit
13 Steering wheel heating 60 14 Adjust steering wheel 60

15 Unlock hood 213
Functions and controls in the center console
1 Control Display 18 9 PDC Park Distance Control 138

2 Ventilation 157 Rearview camera 142
3 Hazard warning system 231 Parking assistant 148
Surround View 142
Central locking system 38
Side View 144
4 Glove compartment 168
10 Driving Dynamics Control 126
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
6 Climate control 152 trol 124
7 Controller with buttons 19
11 Steptronic transmission selector
8 Parking brake 69 lever 75
Manual transmission selector lever 74
16
Cockpit At a glance
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Intelligent emergency call 231 4 Reading lights 100
2 Glass sunroof, electric 48 5 Interior lights 100
3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

ger airbag 104
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Overview of control elements
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Operation
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
to the selected options or country versions.
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept 1 Control Display

The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
ated from a central location.
Control Display
Safety information General information

WARNING To clean the Control Display, follow the care
Operating the integrated information instructions.
systems and communication devices while Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an damaged.
accident. Only use the systems or devices In the case of very high temperatures on the
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, Control Display, e.g., due to intense solar radi‐
stop and use the systems and devices while ation, the brightness may be reduced down to
the vehicle is stationary.◀ complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, e.g., through shadow or climate
control system, the normal functions are re‐
stored.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
18
iDrive At a glance
2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.
Controller with navigation system Buttons on the controller

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select Button Function
menu items and enter the settings. MENU Opens the main menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller. RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
2. Press. directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
19
At a glance iDrive
2. Press.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
3. Move in two directions.
main menu.
Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to, 2. Press the controller.
switch between audio menus.
TEL Opens the Phone menu. Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
BACK Open previous panel.
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
OPTION Open the Options menu. "Settings".
Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
Operating concept new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Opening the main menu ▷ Move the controller to the left.
Press button. Closes current panel and shows previous

display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
20
iDrive At a glance
Opens new panel on top of previous 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
screen. is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 3. Press the controller.
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Opening the Options menu Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
Press button. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Selecting functions
Additional options: move the controller to the 1. "Settings"
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
2. "Touchpad"
displayed.
3. Select the desired function.
Options menu ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". map.
▷ Control options for the selected main ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
▷ If applicable, further operating options for letters and numbers.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Entering letters and numbers
Changing settings Entering letters requires some practice at the
1. Select a field. beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
21
At a glance iDrive
▷ The system distinguishes between upper Example: setting the clock

and lower-case letters and numbers. For
entries, it may be necessary to change be‐ Setting the clock
tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐
On the Control Display:
bers and characters, refer to page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
the Control Display.
played.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
as accents or periods so that the letter can
lighted, and then press the controller.
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
controller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right to display "Time/Date".
in the lower area of the touchpad.
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Using the interactive map and Internet
The interactive map in the navigation system
and Internet pages can be moved using the
touchpad.
Function Operation
Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Internet pages. spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
map or Internet pages. the touchpad with
lighted, and then press the controller.
fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once.

a link on the Internet.
Changing settings
You can use the touchpad to change Control
Display settings, e.g., volume. Swipe left or
right accordingly.
22
iDrive At a glance
6. Turn the controller to set the hours, and Symbol Meaning

then press the controller.
SMS text message received.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes, and
then press the controller. Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.

Status information SIM card is missing.
Status field Enter PIN.

The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols
▷ Time.
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player.
▷ Signal strength of cellular network. Music collection.
▷ Phone status.
Gracenote® database.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
AUX-IN port.
Status field symbols USB audio interface.
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Mobile phone audio interface.
Radio symbols
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.

Split screen
Missed call. General information
Signal strength of cellular network. Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
Symbol flashes: network search. from the onboard computer.
Cellular network is not available. In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
Bluetooth is switched on.
when switching to another menu.
Roaming is active.
23
At a glance iDrive
Switching the split screen on/off Saving a function

On the Control Display: 1. Highlight the function via iDrive.
1. Press button. 2. Press and hold the desired button,

until a signal sounds.
2. "Split screen"
Running a function
Selecting the display
On the Control Display: Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
1. Press button.
when a phone number is selected.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
Displaying the key assignment
selected.
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
or use objects.
content".
The button assignment is displayed at the top
5. Select the desired menu item.
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments

Programmable memory
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
buttons approx. 5 seconds.
General information 2. "OK"
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐

grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
Deleting personal data in the
tions, phone numbers and menu entries. vehicle
Settings are stored for the profile currently
Concept
used.
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
Without navigation system and personal data, such as stored radio stations.
telephone This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons.
24
iDrive At a glance
General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function
▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐
▷ Stored radio stations. ter or number.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended
▷ Travel and onboard computer information. period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g., stored destinations. Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
▷ Phone book.
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
▷ Online data, e.g., Favorites, cookies.
tween entering upper and lower case letters
▷ Voice notes. and numbers:
▷ Login accounts.
Symbol Function
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Enter the letters.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.
Functional requirement or Tip the controller up.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Without navigation system
Deleting data Select the symbol.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display. Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
2. "Settings" tered and letters may be added automatically.
3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data
4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle.
5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
6. "OK" for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
Entering letters and numbers on the Control Display.
General information
1. Turn the controller: select a letter or num‐

ber.
2. Select additional letters or numbers, if
needed.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Using the voice activation
This chapter describes all standard, country- system
series. It also describes features that are not Activating the voice activation system
to the selected options or country versions. 1. Press button on the steering
This also applies to safety-related functions wheel.
and systems. When using these functions and 2. Wait for the signal.
systems, the applicable country provisions 3. Say the command.
must be observed.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Concept
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control cates that the voice activation system is active.
Display can be operated by voice com‐
If no other commands are possible, operate
mands via the voice activation system. The
the function via iDrive.
system supports you with announcements
during input.
Terminating the voice activation
▷ Functions that can only be used when the system
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
Press the button on the steering
voice activation system.
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation Possible commands
system. Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
Requirements that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
Via the Control Display, set a language that is play.
also supported by the voice activation system There are short commands for many functions.
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ You may select list entries such as phone list
fied. entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
Set the language, refer to page 93. tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud

You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
E.g., if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the Via short command

commands for the settings are read out loud. The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
Executing functions using short
commands 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
2. Press button on the steering
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
wheel.
The list for short commands of the voice acti‐
3. ›Tone‹
vation system can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control Dis‐
play.
Setting the voice dialog
Help dialog for the voice activation You can set the system to use standard dialog
system or a short version.
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹. The short version of the voice dialog plays
Additional commands for the help dialog: back short messages in abbreviated form.
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ 1. "Settings"
tion about the current operating options
2. "Language/Units"
and the most important commands for
them. 3. "Speech type:"
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: announces in‐ 4. Select setting.
formation about the principle of operation
for the voice activation system.
Example: opening the tone

settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if Adjusting the volume

needed.
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
2. Press button on the steering structions until the desired volume is set.
wheel. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
3. ›Radio‹ volume of other audio sources is changed.
4. ›Tone‹ ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
27
At a glance Voice activation system
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 231, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1. Press button.
and systems. When using these functions and 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
systems, the applicable country provisions 3. Press the controller.
must be observed. 4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
Integrated Owner's Manual ▷ "Search by pictures"
in the vehicle ▷ "Owner's Manual"
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐

played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated

Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Quick Reference Guide
Page by page with link access
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
Turn the controller until the next or previous
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
page is displayed.
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown. This information can also be
displayed while driving.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
Search by images ping the links.
Based on illustrations, image search provides Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
information and descriptions. This is useful, the controller to browse from page to page.
e.g., when the terminology for a feature is not Scroll back.
known.
Scroll forward.
29
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - operating instructions Programmable memory buttons

for the currently selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via iDrive.
1. Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more
menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

operating instructions
To switch from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
30
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
series. It also describes features that are not If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
to the selected options or country versions. risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
This also applies to safety-related functions vehicle from the outside when there are people
and systems. When using these functions and in it.◀
WARNING
must be observed.
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
Remote control
tions:
General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
trols with integrated key. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Each remote control contains a replaceable dows.
battery. Replace the battery, refer to ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
page 36.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
You may set the key functions depending on
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 44.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
The vehicle stores personal settings for every exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 42.
Overview
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 220.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the 1 Unlock
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
2 Lock
be opened from the outside.◀
3 Opening the tailgate
4 Panic mode
34
Opening and closing Controls
Unlocking the engine or the ignition using the Start/Stop

button.
Press button on the remote control.
Lock
Depending on the settings, refer to page 44,
the following access points are unlocked. Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. This function is not available, if the interior
In addition, the following functions are exe‐ lamps were switched off manually.
cuted: The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
▷ The settings saved in the driver profile, re‐ ent brightness.
fer to page 42, are applied. If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
▷ The interior lights and courtesy lamps are onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
activated. This function is not available, if tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
the interior lamps were switched off man‐ theft warning system, refer to page 46, are
ually. turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
function was activated.
Tailgate
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 45, is
switched off. General information
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐ To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
ent brightness. place the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
Convenient opening the country version, it is possible to specify
Press and hold this button on the re‐ whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
mote control after unlocking. locking with the remote control. Create the
settings, refer to page 44.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote Safety information
control is pressed.
WARNING
Locking Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
1. Close the driver's door. ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
2. Press button on the remote control. is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap NOTE
are being locked. During opening, the tailgate pivots back
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 45, is and up. There is a risk of property damage.
switched on. Make sure that the area of movement of the
If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
the vehicle, this means that the engine or igni‐
tion is still switched on. In this case, switch off
35
Opening Have old batteries disposed of by a

dealer’s service center or another
Press button on the remote control for
qualified service center or repair shop
approx. 1 second.
or take them to a collection point.
Panic mode
New remote controls
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
New remote controls are available from a deal‐
yourself in a dangerous situation.
er’s service center or another qualified service
Press button on the remote control for center or repair shop.
at least 3 seconds.
Blocking remote controls
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
A lost remote control can be blocked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
Replacing the battery
center or repair shop.
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 37.
Malfunction
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and General information
lift the cover with a lever movement of the A Check Control message is displayed.
integrated key, arrow 2.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
3. Using a pointed object, press battery in di‐ ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
rection of arrow and lift it out. metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of a mobile device, e.g.,
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐ charging of a mobile phone.
itive side facing up. In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
5. Press the cover closed. unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 37.
36
Starting the engine via emergency NOTE

detection of the remote control The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Removing
1. Hold the remote control with its back

against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Press button, arrow 1, and remove key, ar‐

Integrated key row 2.
General information Locking/unlocking via the door lock

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐ Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
ble with special knowledge. lock using the integrated key.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐ The other doors must be unlocked or locked
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a from the inside.
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people Alarm system
in it.◀
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
37
The alarm system is triggered when the door is ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via handle twice: the first time unlocks the
the door lock. door, the second time opens it. The other
In order to stop this alarm, unlock vehicle with doors remain locked.
the remote control or switch on the ignition, if
needed, through emergency detection of the
remote control, refer to page 37. Comfort Access
Concept
Button for central locking The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
system ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
General information trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is The vehicle automatically detects the remote
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning control when it is in close proximity or in the
system and interior lights come on. vehicle's interior.
Overview General information

Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening tailgate.
▷ Open tailgate with no-touch activation.
Functional requirements
Button for the central locking system. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
Unlocking and locking
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
Pressing the central locking system button
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
locks or unlocks the vehicle with the doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system

button to unlock the doors together, and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐
rest.
38
Unlocking Closing
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front Touch the surface on the door handle of the
passenger door completely, arrow. driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
This corresponds with pressing the button your finger and hold it there without grasping
on the remote control. the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button on the remote control.
Locking
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Open tailgate
General information
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Touch the surface on the door handle of the To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with the remote control in the cargo area.
your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
ing the door handle. Safety information
This corresponds with pressing the button WARNING
on the remote control.
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
Convenient closing sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Safety information
NOTE
WARNING
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
With convenient closing, body parts can and up. There is a risk of property damage.
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure Make sure that the area of movement of the
that the area of movement of the doors is clear tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
during convenient closing.◀
39
Opening WARNING
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Press button on the tailgate.
Performing the foot movement

Opening tailgate with no-touch
activation WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
Concept may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system.
The tailgate can be opened with no-touch acti‐ There is a risk of injury. When moving your
vation using the remote control you are carry‐ foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
ing. Two sensors detect a forward-directed not touch the vehicle.◀
foot motion in the center of the area at the rear 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
of the vehicle and the tailgate opens. about an arm's length away from the rear
of the vehicle.
General information
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
the remote control in the cargo area. With this movement, the leg must pass
If the remote control is in the sensor range, the through the ranges of both sensors.
tailgate may open or close inadvertently if you
unintentionally move your foot or if something
else moves in the detection range.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If you open the tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion, locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system. The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
There is a risk of injury. When moving your was previously locked or unlocked.
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
not touch the vehicle.◀ tem flashes.
40
Malfunction NOTE
Remote control detection by the vehicle may During opening, the tailgate pivots back
malfunction under the following circumstan‐ and up. There is a risk of property damage.
ces: Make sure that the area of movement of the
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36. Opening and closing
transmission towers or other equipment Opening from the outside
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection by
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity of the remote control.
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock the vehi‐
gether with electronic devices.
cle.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
Press on the top half of the BMW label.
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
page 37. trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Unlocking with the remote control,
Tailgate refer to page 35.
General information Opening from the inside

To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
With the vehicle stationary, press the
place the remote control in the cargo area.
button in the driver's floor area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐ Closing
locking with the remote control. Create the
settings, refer to page 44.
Safety information
WARNING
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
41
Locking separately If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐

The tailgate can be locked separately using the trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
compartment is locked, the tailgate cannot be file are automatically applied.
opened. If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐ stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
row 2. meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. The
saved in the driver profile currently activated.
tailgate is secured and disconnected from the
central locking system. If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings saved in it will be applied automat‐
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
ically. The new driver profile is assigned to the
using valet service. The remote control can be
remote control currently used.
handed out without the integrated key.
There is an additional profile available that is
Emergency unlocking not assigned to any remote control: It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without
changing the personal driver profiles.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country
and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. ▷ Lights.
The tailgate unlocks. ▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
Personal Profile ▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
Concept
▷ Control Display.
Using Personal Profile, individual settings for
several drivers can be saved and called up ▷ Navigation.
again at a later time. ▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera.
General information ▷ Side View.
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
▷ Top View.
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles ▷ Head-up Display.
assigned. ▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
42
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ On the Control Display:

tion, steering wheel position.
1. "Settings"
▷ Intelligent Safety.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
3. Open "Options".
Profile management 4. "Rename current profile"
Opening profiles Reset profiles

Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐ The settings of the active profile are reset to
ferent profile may be activated. This allows you their factory settings.
to call up personal vehicle settings if you did On the Control Display:
not unlock the vehicle with your own key.
1. "Settings"
Via iDrive:
2. "Profiles"
1. "Settings" 3. Open "Options".
2. "Profiles" 4. "Reset current profile"
3. Select a profile.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile Exporting profiles
are automatically applied. Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ ported.
mote control being used at the time. This can be helpful for saving and retrieving
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ personal settings, e.g., before delivering the
ent remote control, this profile will apply to vehicle to a workshop. Profiles can be taken to
both remote controls. another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function.
Using the guest profile On the Control Display:
The guest profile is for individual settings that 1. "Settings"
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files. 2. "Profiles"
This can be useful for drivers who are using 3. "Export profile"
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
own profile. USB interface: "USB device"
On the Control Display: Popular file systems for USB media are sup‐
1. "Settings" ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
2. "Profiles" mats may not support the export.
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not Importing profiles
assigned to the current remote control. Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
Renaming profiles Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ imported via the USB interface.
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
43
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ The entire vehicle is unlocked.
ported profile.
On the Control Display: Tailgate
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select the symbol.
3. "Import profile"
4. Select the desired function:
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
▷ "Tailgate"
USB interface: "USB device"
The tailgate is opened.
Display profile list during start ▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The profile list can be displayed during each The tailgate is opened and the doors
start to select the desired profile. are unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Open "Options".
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
4. "Display user list at startup" mation signals.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Settings
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
General information the horn.
Depending on the equipment and country- ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
specific variant of your vehicle, different open‐ Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
ing and closing settings are available. locking by one.
These settings are saved in the active driver
profile, refer to page 42. Automatic locking
1. "Settings"
Unlocking 2. "Doors/key"
Doors 3. Select the desired function:
1. "Settings" ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
2. "Doors/key" The vehicle locks automatically after a

short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock after start driving"
▷ "Driver's door only"
The vehicle locks automatically after
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler you drive off.
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
44
Adjusting the last seat and mirror Tailgate with the alarm system
position switched on
1. "Settings" The tailgate can be opened even when the
2. "Doors/key" alarm system is switched on.
3. "Last seat position autom." After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
once.
tions.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
Alarm system yourself in a dangerous situation.
General information Press button on the remote control for
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm at least 3 seconds.
system reacts to the following changes:
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate. Indicator lamp on the interior mirror
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
tem.
2 seconds:
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
The alarm system is switched on.
Switching on and off ▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐

onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
onds:
remote control or with Comfort Access, the
alarm system is switched on and off at the Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
same time. are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
Door lock with the alarm system access points are secured.
switched on When the still open access points are
The alarm system is triggered when the door is closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via sensor will be switched on.
the door lock. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 46. ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
45
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking Switching off the alarm
until the engine ignition is switched on, but ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
no longer than approx. 5 minutes: or switch on the ignition, if needed through
An alarm has been triggered. emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 36.
Tilt alarm sensor ▷ With Comfort Access:
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
The alarm system responds in situations such
driver's or front passenger door com‐
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
pletely.
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor

The windows and the glass sunroof must be
Power windows
closed for the system to function properly.
Safety information
Avoiding unintentional alarms WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
General information and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐ that the area of movement of the windows is
ized action occurred. clear during opening and closing.◀
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: WARNING
▷ In automatic vehicle washes. Unattended children or animals can
▷ In duplex garages. cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer. tions:
▷ With animals in the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
sensor can be switched off in such situations. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
46
Overview Pinch protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
Power windows tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Opening
▷ Press the button to the resistance

Closing without the pinch protection
point.
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
The window opens while the switch is held.
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
The window opens automatically. Pressing
point and hold it there.
the switch again stops the motion.
The pinch protection is limited and the
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
window reopens slightly if the closing force
fer to page 35.
exceeds a certain threshold.
Closing
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
hold it there.
point.
The window closes without jam protection.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance Roller sunblinds

point.
Roller sunblind for rear window
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
General information
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
page 39. blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
47
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot Overview

be moved at low interior temperatures.
Extending or retracting roller sunblind

for rear window
Press button.
Glass sunroof, electric

General information Tilting the glass sunroof
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be Push switch briefly upward.
operated together or separately using the
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
same switch.
tilted.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
▷ The opened glass sunroof
tion is switched on.
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
Safety information
does not move.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. sliding visor together
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ ▷ Press the switch in the de‐
ing.◀ sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
WARNING Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
Unattended children or animals can sor open together as long as
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ the switch is held down.
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ The glass sunroof closes as
tions: long as the switch is held
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. down. The sliding visor can
▷ Releasing the parking brake. be manually closed.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
dows. past the resistance point.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically.
The sliding visor can be manually closed.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ tion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐

fer to page 35.
48
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to Closing from the raised position
page 38. without pinch protection
If there is an external danger,
Comfort position push the switch forward past the
If the glass sunroof is not completely opened resistance point and hold it.
automatically, the comfort position has been The glass sunroof closes with‐
attained. In this position the wind noises in the out jam protection.
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing Initializing after a power interruption
the switch.
General information
Pinch protection system After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
General information operated to a limited extent.
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ The system can be initialized when the vehicle
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ is stationary and the engine is running.
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
closes without jam protection.
the tilted position during closing. The glass
sunroof reopens slightly. Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the open position Initializing the system

without pinch protection Press the switch up and hold it
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐ until the initialization is com‐
lows: plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof is completely closed.
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐

sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain threshold.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
49
Controls Settings
Settings
Vehicle features and options the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
This chapter describes all standard, country- while driving.◀
series. It also describes features that are not WARNING
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due There is a risk of jamming when moving
to the selected options or country versions. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
This also applies to safety-related functions property damage. Make sure that the area of
and systems. When using these functions and movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
systems, the applicable country provisions justment.◀
must be observed.
Manually adjustable seats
Sitting safely Overview
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position also plays an important
role in an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 56.
▷ Airbags.
1 Forward/backward
Seats 2 Thigh support

3 Seat tilt
Safety information 4 Backrest width
WARNING 5 Lumbar support
Seat adjustments while driving can lead 6 Height
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle 7 Backrest tilt
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
50
Settings Controls
Forward/backward Seat tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
direction. tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
ward or back slightly making sure it engages engages properly.
properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Height
Overview
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary. 1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
Backrest tilt 3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function is acti‐
vated for this purpose.
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
51
Controls Settings
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Push switch forward or backward. Move switch forward or backward.
Height Thigh support
Push switch up or down. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Seat tilt
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Move switch up or down.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
You can change the width of the backrest us‐
ing the side wings to adjust the lateral support.
52
Settings Controls
Press button on the corre‐ Entering the rear

sponding side.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
Front seat heating the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
Overview movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐
rests before driving.◀
Manual length adjustment

Seat heating
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
Switching on for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
Press button once for each tempera‐ ment.
ture level.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Switching off
2. Fold backrest forward.
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out. 3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
53
Controls Settings
Electric forward/backward adjustment Safety belts

Comfort entry Number of safety belts
The comfort entry contains a memory function The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ensure occupant safety. However, they can
ment. only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
when fastening it.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
2. Fold backrest forward. will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
3. To change the entry area:
▷ Press and hold this button until Safety information
the seat has moved to the de‐
WARNING
sired position. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement. If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a
tomatically moves to the end po‐
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
Original position
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
1. Moving the seat to its original position: respectively secured in designated child re‐
▷ Press and hold this button until straint systems.◀
the seat has moved to its original
position. Releasing the button stops WARNING
window/roof movement. The protective effect of the safety belts
▷ Press button briefly. The seat can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
moves to its original position. tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
Pressing again stops the motion. safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
the event of an accident or during braking and
2. Fold the backrest back.
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
54
Settings Controls
Correct use of safety belts Damage to safety belts

▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight WARNING
to your body as possible over your lap and
The protective effect of the safety belts
shoulders.
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips ing situations:
over your lap. The safety belt may not
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
press on your stomach.
changed in any other way.
▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in
soiled.
across hard or fragile objects.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
modified.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
ward around your upper body.
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
Buckling the safety belt belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Belt carrier
Concept
The belt carrier makes it easier to put on the
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in safety belt.
the belt buckle.
General information
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and

passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ After the door is closed and the vehicle key has
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety been detected in the vehicle's interior, the belt
belts are positioned correctly. The carrier extends automatically and keeps the
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above safety belt ready to put on, arrow. After the belt
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated is put on, it goes back into the idle position.
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
55
Controls Settings
If the safety belt has not yet been applied, the WARNING
belt carrier goes back under the following cir‐ Body parts can be jammed when moving
cumstances: the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Waiting time approx. five minutes. Make sure that the area of movement is clear
▷ Opening the respective door. when moving the head restraint.◀
▷ After a short trip. WARNING

▷ Locking the vehicle. Objects on the head restraint reduce the
If the respective door is closed, the belt carrier protective effect in the head and neck area.
is re-activated when the vehicle key has been There is a risk of injury.
detected in the interior. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
Pinch protection system directly on the head restraint.
WARNING ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
When extending and retracting the belt termined to be safe for attachment to a
carrier, body parts and objects can be jammed. head restraint.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property dam‐ ▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
age. Make sure that the area of movement of while driving.◀
the belt carrier is clear.◀
If the belt carrier encounters resistance when Correctly adjusted head restraint
extending or retracting, the belt carrier moves
back somewhat in the respective opposite. Af‐ General information
ter two attempts, the belt carrier stops in this A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
position. risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
To reactivate the belt carrier, open and close of an accident.
the door.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
Head restraints approximately at eye level.
Safety information Distance

WARNING Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐ If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
straints can cause injuries in the head and the tilt of the backrest.
neck area. There is a risk of injury. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
56
Settings Controls
Adjusting the height
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐

sistance.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
straint out completely.
head restraint down.
Tilt Seat and mirror memory

Three different tilt positions are available.
Concept
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile and called up. Set‐
tings for the backrest width and lumbar sup‐
port are not stored in memory.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ can lead to unexpected movements of the
straint forward, arrow 1. seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
restraint folds as far back as possible. function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
sitting in the seat in question.
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
57
Controls Settings
Overview Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
Storing trieved if this function is active.
2. Set the desired position. Safety information
WARNING
3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
ton lights up. than they appear. The distance to the traffic
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
is lit. The LED goes out. while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
Button was pressed inadvertently: dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Press button again.
The LED goes out. Overview
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time. 1 Settings 59
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Calling up of a seat position 3 Folding in and out 59
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
Selecting a mirror
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To change over to the other mirror:
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
Slide the switch.
▷ Open and close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
58
Settings Controls
Adjusting electrically Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in

the following situations:
Press button.
▷ In vehicle washes.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement. ▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Saving positions
The current exterior mirror position can be Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
stored via the seat and mirror memory. matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Adjusting manually
Automatic heating
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror. Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Automatic dimming feature
Concept The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on matically dimmed. Photocells are used to con‐
the front passenger side is tilted downward. trol the Interior mirror.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g. Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Activating Turn knob
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Folding in and out Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.

15 mph/20 km/h.
59
Controls Settings
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Settings

feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
Photocells are used for control: tion.
▷ In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving Heated steering wheel
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel Switching on/off
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
60
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information Safety information
WARNING WARNING
Unattended children or animals can Children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
tions: fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
ditional injuries, e.g., in the event of an acci‐
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dent or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
dows. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se‐
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using
▷ Using vehicle equipment. suitable restraint systems.◀

leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ Children on the front passenger seat
hicle. Take the remote control with you when Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Children should always be in the rear
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 103.
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
Safety information
for children is in the rear seat.
WARNING
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in Active front-seat passenger airbags can
suitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐ injure a child in a child restraint system when
cordance with the age, weight and size of the the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
child. Children 13 years of age or older must jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
restraint system can no longer be used due to GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
their age, weight and size.
61
Controls Transporting children safely
WARNING jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger

The stability of the child restraint system airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
adjustment or improper installation of the child After installing a child restraint system in the
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
Make sure that the child restraint system fits knee and side airbags on the front passenger
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ side are deactivated.
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
automatically, refer to page 103.
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
Installing child restraint the best possible position for the belt and to
systems offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
General information If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
Pay attention to the specifications of the child cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
restraint system manufacturer when selecting, move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
installing, and using child restraint systems. til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Safety information
WARNING Backrest width
The stability of the child restraint system Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat child restraint system in the front passenger
adjustment or improper installation of the child seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. not change the backrest width again and do
Make sure that the child restraint system fits not call up a memory position.
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests Child seat security
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
injure a child in a child restraint system when
ten child restraint systems.
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
62
Transporting children safely Controls
Locking the safety belt Unlocking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely. 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the 2. Remove the child restraint system.
safety belt. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull pletely.
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information not recommended. For the center position,
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ use the vehicle seat belt instead.
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ Before installing LATCH child
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ restraint fixing systems
turer when installing and using LATCH child Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
restraint fixing system. child restraint system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Assembly of LATCH child restraint
The lower anchors may be used to attach the fixing systems
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child 1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child turer's information.
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Safety information
WARNING Child restraint system with a tether
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐ strap
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐ Mounting points
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or The respective symbol shows the an‐
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐ chor for the upper retaining strap.
chors are securely engaged and that the Seats with an upper top tether are
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐ marked with this symbol. It can be found on
curely against the backrest.◀ the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Position Safety information

The corresponding symbol shows the NOTE
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are The mounting points for the upper re‐
marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐ taining straps of child restraint systems are
bols. Use of inner lower anchors from only provided for these retaining straps. When
standard outboard LATCH positions to other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
install a child restraint system in the center is damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
63
Controls Transporting children safely
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐

per retaining straps.◀
Routing the retaining strap

WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Upper retaining strap
3 Head restraint
4 Rear window shelf
5 Mounting point
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point
1. Lift the cover over the mounting point.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the
head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
64
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the brake.
series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
to the selected options or country versions. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
This also applies to safety-related functions out.
and systems. When using these functions and To save battery power when the engine is off,
systems, the applicable country provisions switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
must be observed. electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
Start/Stop button When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
Concept selector lever position D or R is selected.
Pressing the Start/Stop button The ignition is switched off automatically in the
switches the ignition on or off following situations while the vehicle is station‐
and starts the engine. ary and the engine is off:
Steptronic transmission: the en‐ ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
gine starts with the brake pedal low beams are activated.
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
Manual transmission: the engine starts with completely, so that the engine can still be
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop started.
button is pressed.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
Ignition on the low beams are switched off.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at with driver's door open and low beams off.
the same time. The low beams switch to parking lights after
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐ approx. 15 minutes of no use.
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Radio ready state
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
instrument cluster light up for a varied length running: press the Start/Stop button.
of time. Some electronic systems/power consumers
To save battery power when the engine is off, remain ready for operation.
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
electronic systems/power consumers. cally in the following situations:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
65
Controls Driving
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
tral locking system. turn the front wheels in the direction of the
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged curb.
completely, so that the engine can still be ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
started. also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., chock.◀
the ignition is automatically switched off for the NOTE
following reasons:
In the case of repeated starting attempts
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. or repeated starting in quick succession, the
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
▷ When automatically switching from low The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
beams to parking lights. a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights Steptronic transmission
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated. Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Starting the engine The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
Safety information gine starts.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ Manual transmission
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ Starting the engine
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐ 1. Depress the brake pedal.
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐ 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of tral.
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀ The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
WARNING gine starts.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
66
Driving Controls
Engine stop Steptronic transmission
Safety information Switching off the engine

1. Engage selector lever position P with the
WARNING
vehicle stopped.
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ The engine is switched off.
tions: The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the parking brake.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ Manual transmission
dows.
Switching off the engine
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
▷ Using vehicle equipment. Start/Stop button.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not 2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING Auto Start/Stop function

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ Concept
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
against rolling. The system switches off the engine during a
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
against rolling away, observe the following: lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the General information
curb.
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, system is automatically activated or deacti‐
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel vated.
chock.◀
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
Before driving into a vehicle wash the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash, Stop function is active, it is available when the
observe instructions for going into an auto‐ vehicle is traveling faster than about
matic vehicle wash, refer to page 238. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
67
Controls Driving
Steptronic transmission: ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ matic climate control is switched on.
tion D. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while ▷ At higher elevations.
the vehicle is stopped. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the ▷ The parking assistant is activated.
driver's door is closed.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
Manual transmission:
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is M/S or R.
not pressed.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed. Starting the engine
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
when the engine is switched off. lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
Displays in the instrument cluster
brake pedal.
The READY display in the tach‐ ▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
ometer signals that the Auto pressed.
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
The display indicates that the
After the engine switches off automatically, it
conditions for an automatic en‐
will not start again automatically if any one of
gine stop have not been met.
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
Functional limitations ▷ The hood was unlocked.
The engine is not switched off automatically in Some indicator lights light up for a varied
the following situations: length of time.
▷ External temperature too low. The engine can only be started via the Start/
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Stop button.
matic climate control is running.
Functional limitations
▷ The vehicle's interior has not yet been
heated or cooled to the required level. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
lowing situations:
ature.
▷ Excessive warming of the vehicle's interior
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
when the cooling function is switched on.
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
68
Driving Controls
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ Steptronic transmission:

lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
▷ The vehicle begins rolling. switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ is deactivated.
matic climate control is switched on. Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. matically.
▷ Excessive cooling of the vehicle's interior 2. Set the parking brake.
when the heating is switched on. Manual transmission:
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
number of times in succession.
is deactivated.
Activating/deactivating the system 2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
manually 3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Using the button
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
Press button. continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is service center or repair shop.
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
Parking brake
The engine can only be stopped or started Safety information
via the Start/Stop button.
WARNING
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Switching off the vehicle during an cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
automatic engine stop against rolling.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when against rolling away, observe the following:
leaving it. ▷ Set the parking brake.
69
Controls Driving
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Turn signal, high beams,

turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
headlight flasher
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Turn signal
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀ Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
Applying signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
The lever automatically engages after being in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
pulled up. on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set. Using turn signals
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, en‐

gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set. The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation.
Releasing To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
1. "Settings"
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down. 2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
used.
70
Driving Controls
Signaling briefly NOTE

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
it there for as long as you want the turn signal the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
to flash. motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
Malfunction shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Switching on
High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Tap the lever up or press it beyond the resist‐

ance point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ High beams, arrow 1. The wipers switch to intermittent operation
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Washer/wiper system Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
General information The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, sition when released.
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly. Switching off and brief wipe
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching Press the lever down.
on.◀ ▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
71
Controls Driving
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
press down once. the rain sensor
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
General information Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐ sensor.
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐ sensor.
tion is preset.
Safety information Windshield and headlamp washer

system
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Safety information
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
WARNING
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀ The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
Activating/deactivating the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Press button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
LED in wiper lever lights up.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
72
Driving Controls
Cleaning Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
4. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐

lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Folding down the wipers
Fold-away position of the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Concept 1. Switch on the ignition.
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐ 2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
shield in the fold-away position. their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐ Washer fluid
tions.
General information
Safety information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
WARNING ervoir.
If the wipers start moving in the folded Use a mixture of tap water, windshield washer
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ concentrate, and possibly antifreeze for the
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is windshield washer system.
a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Recommended minimum fill quantity:
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
73
Controls Driving
Safety information Overview

WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
states; do not exceed the allowable washer gine compartment.
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ Malfunction
tainer.
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐ centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀ to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+ 5 ℉/- 15 ℃.
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
Manual transmission
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Safety information
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀ WARNING
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on against rolling.
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀ ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
NOTE turn the front wheels in the direction of the
Mixing different windshield washer con‐ curb.
centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
washing system. There is a risk of property also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
damage. Do not mix different windshield chock.◀
washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐ NOTE
vided on the containers.◀ When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
74
Driving Controls
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the R Reverse

right.◀ Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Shifting N is Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
General information tion N, e.g., in vehicle washes.
The engine speed during a shifting operation is
adjusted automatically for harmonious and dy‐ P Park
namic gear shifting. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Reverse gear
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. cally in the following situations:
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift ▷ After the engine is switched off when the
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐ vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
verse gear with a forward shifting movement. page 65, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 65, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
Steptronic transmission ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
Safety information pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
WARNING stationary and selector lever position D
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move or R is engaged.
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle Kickdown
against rolling. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
against rolling away, observe the following: beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Engaging selector lever positions
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb. General information
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
chock.◀ pedal until you are ready to start.
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
Selector lever positions lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
D Drive
▷ With the vehicle stationary, depress the
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
brake pedal before shifting out of selector
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift
automatically.
block will not be deactivated and the shift
command will not be executed.
75
Controls Driving
Selector lever lock Engaging selector lever position P

A lock prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Press P button, arrow.
Sport program and manual mode

To release the lock: press button, arrow.
Activating the sport program
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐

tor lever position D.
With the driver's safety belt fastened, tap the The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
selector lever in the desired direction, beyond vated.
a resistance point, if needed.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to Activating the M/S manual mode
its center position.
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
mission continues to shift automatically.
76
Driving Controls
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐ Shift paddles

tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
sible if the engine speed is too high. you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ hands on the steering wheel.
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ ▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
lected gear. ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
Steptronic Sport transmission:
the lowest possible gear can be selected
preventing automatic upshifting in
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
M/S manual mode
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
sible if the engine speed is too high.
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met: The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
▷ DSC deactivated.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
▷ TRACTION activated.
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
▷ SPORT+ activated. transmission switches to manual mode tempo‐
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ rarily in selector lever position D and perma‐
down. nently in selector lever position S.
With the respective transmission version, the In selector lever position D, after conservative
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ driving for a certain amount of time in manual
taneously operating the kickdown and the left mode or if there has been no acceleration or
shift paddles. This is not possible, when shifting of the shift paddles within a certain
switching briefly via the shift paddles from se‐ amount of time, the transmission switches
lector lever position D to manual mode M/S. back to automatic mode.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
Ending the sport program/manual sition D, it is possible to switch into automatic
mode mode with some transmission versions:
Push the selector lever to the right. ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Or
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
77
Controls Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter

stops.
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see chapter Tow-
starting and towing.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
Concept
maneuver vehicle from a danger area. Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
General information
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
The use of Launch Control causes premature
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
component wear since this function represents
ing away.
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Engaging selector lever position N Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 176, period.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
again as soon as possible.
must audibly start.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
3. Press the button on the selector lever, see
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
arrow 1, and press and hold the selector
lever into selector lever position N, see ar‐
row N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
Requirements
played in the instrument cluster. Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
A corresponding Check Control message
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
is displayed.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select Sport+ with

the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
4. Release the selector lever. cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
78
Driving Controls
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
79
Controls Displays
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 85 5 Engine oil temperature 85

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption
3 Messages, for example, Check Control 7 Electronic displays 80
4 Tachometer 85 8 Reset miles 85
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 89. ▷ Date, refer to page 86.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 85. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 86.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 68. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 78.
▷ Onboard computer, refer to page 90. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 85.
80
Displays Controls
▷ Messages, e.g., Check Control, refer to Red lights

page 81.
▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to Safety belt reminder
page 86. Safety belt on the driver's side is not
▷ Navigation display. buckled. For some country-specific
▷ Range, refer to page 86. models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to seat.
page 126.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 87. belt on the driver or passenger side is not
▷ Speed Limit Info, refer to page 88. buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
▷ Time, refer to page 86. activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
Check Control correctly.
Concept Airbag system

The Check Control system monitors functions
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
not working.
in the monitored systems.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
General information by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster Parking brake, brake system
and in the Head-up Display.
For additional information, see Releas‐
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a ing the parking brake, refer to page 70.
SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lights
Approach control warning
General information
Indicator lamp illuminates: advance
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
warning is issued, for example when
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
there is the impending danger of a col‐
nations and colors.
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
Several of the lights are checked for proper too small.
functioning and light up temporarily when the
Increase distance.
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Indicator lamp flashes: acute warning of the
imminent danger of a collision when the vehi‐
cle approaches another vehicle at a relatively
high differential speed.
81
Controls Displays
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control

neuver.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
Person warning vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
ces.
If a collision with a person detected in
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has mal‐
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
functioned.
up and a signal sounds.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
Orange lights pair shop.
Active Cruise Control For additional information, refer to Dynamic

Stability Control DSC, refer to page 124.
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
For additional information, refer to Active Control is activated
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, ACC,
refer to page 130. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol is activated.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Indicator lamp illuminates: a vehicle has Stability Control DSC, refer to page 124, and
been detected ahead of you. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
Indicator lamp flashes: the conditions page 125.
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the Flat Tire Monitor FTM
brakes until you actively resume control by
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
pedal.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
Yellow lights neuvers.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 109.
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Have the system immediately checked The indicator lamp is illuminated.

by a dealer’s service center or another The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
qualified service center or repair shop. low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Observe the information in the Check Control
message.
82
Displays Controls
The indicator lamp flashes and is then illumi‐ For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
nated continuously. ture warning, refer to page 119.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected. Green lights
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐ Turn signal
ing the area of the interference, the system Turn signal switched on.
automatically becomes active again.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
Reset the system again. has failed.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s refer to page 70.
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
Parking lights, headlight
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
service center or repair shop. vated.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ For additional information, refer to
tor, refer to page 104. Parking lights/low beams, headlamp control,
refer to page 96.
Steering system
Front fog lights
Steering system in some cases not
working. Front fog lights are activated.
Have the steering system checked by a For additional information, refer to
dealer’s service center or another qualified Front fog lights, refer to page 99.
service center or repair shop.
High-beam Assistant
Engine functions
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
Engine function impaired. High beams are switched on and off
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s automatically depending on the traffic
service center or another qualified situation.
service center or repair shop. For additional information, refer to High-beam
For additional information, refer to On-board Assistant, refer to page 98.
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 221.
Cruise control
Lane departure warning
The system is switched on. It maintains
System is switched on and under cer‐ the speed that was set using the con‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected trol elements on the steering wheel.
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
83
Controls Displays
Blue lights Hiding Check Control messages
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, see High
beams, refer to page 71.
General lamps
Check Control
Press and hold button on signal lever.
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
SMS text messages eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
SMS text messages in combination with a sages are displayed consecutively.
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a These messages can be hidden for approx.
Check Control message and the meaning of 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
the indicator and warning lights. played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
Supplementary SMS text messages
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
Additional information, such as on the cause of They are stored and can be displayed
an error or the required action, can be called up again later.
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be Displaying stored Check Control
automatically displayed on the Control Display. messages
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the 1. "Vehicle info"
following functions can be selected. 2. "Vehicle status"
▷ "Owner's Manual" 3. "Check Control"
Display additional information about the 4. Select the SMS text message.
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual. Messages after trip completion
▷ "Service request" Special messages displayed while driving are
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ displayed again after the ignition is switched
other qualified service center or repair off.
shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
84
Displays Controls
Fuel gauge Check the coolant level.
Vehicle tilt position may cause

the display to vary.
Odometer and trip odometer
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the Display
fuel pump symbol shows which
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 192.
The yellow indicator lamp illuminates,

once the fuel reserve is reached.
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
Tachometer ▷ When the ignition is
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning switched off, the time, the
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ external temperature and
rupted to protect the engine. the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end. External temperature
Drive at moderate engine
WARNING
and vehicle speeds.
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
ture: the pointer is in the
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
middle or in the left half of
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
the temperature display.
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control If the indicator drops to
message is also displayed. +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
When the engine oil temperature is too A Check Control message is
high, a red indicator lamp is displayed. displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
A red indicator lamp is displayed.
85
Controls Displays
Time 2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Additional indicators"
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
Current fuel consumption
trol Display.
Instrument cluster
Date Displays the current fuel con‐

sumption. Check whether you
The date is displayed in the on‐ are currently driving in an effi‐
board computer. cient and environmentally-
The date and date format can be friendly manner.
set on the Control Display.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Range
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
Display
are currently driving in an effi‐
With a low remaining range: cient and environmentally-
▷ A Check Control message is friendly manner.
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is Displaying the current fuel
shown on the onboard com‐ consumption
puter. 1. "Settings"
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g., taking 2. "Instrument cluster"
curves aggressively, the engine function is
not always ensured. 3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
The Check Control message appears continu‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km Energy recovery
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ Display
sured anymore. There is a risk of property The energy of motion of the ve‐
damage. Refuel promptly.◀ hicle is converted to electrical
energy while coasting. The vehi‐
Displaying the cruising range cle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
duced.
the range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
86
Displays Controls
Service requirements Symbols
Concept Sym‐ Description

bols
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes. No service is currently required.
General information
After the ignition is turned on the instrument The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ tion is approaching.
nance.
The service deadline has already
A service advisor can read out the current passed.
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Entering appointment dates
Display Enter the dates for the required vehicle inspec‐
tions.
Detailed information on service
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
requirements
set correctly.
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play. 1. "Vehicle info"
1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"
3. "Service required" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ 5. "Date:"
gally mandated inspections are displayed. 6. Adjust the settings.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ 7. Confirm.
tion.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
87
Controls Displays
3. Open "Options". Speed Limit Info

4. "Last Service Request"
Speed Limit Info
Gear shift indicator Concept

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
Concept permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation. General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
General information detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ tions, etc. are also detected and compared
tronic transmission and with manual with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the
transmission. rain sensor, and will be displayed depending
on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Manual transmission: displaying
Safety information
Symbol Description
WARNING
Fuel efficient gear is set.
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
Shift up to fuel efficient gear. bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Overview
Shift into neutral.
Camera
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
88
Displays Controls
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
ror clean and clear. reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
Switching on/off mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
1. "Settings" camera.
2. "Instrument cluster" ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
3. "Speed limit information" system are incorrect.
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐ ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
played on the CID (central information display) tem.
in the instrument cluster via the onboard com‐ ▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
puter. such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
Display
speed sticker.
The following is displayed in the instrument
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
cluster:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Speed Limit Info ately after vehicle delivery.
Current speed limit. ▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists in the

Speed Limit Info not available.
instrument cluster
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
Head-up Display. ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
System limits ▷ Current audio source.
The system may not be fully functional and ▷ Redial phone feature.
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ ▷ Turn on voice activation system.
lowing situations:
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. namics Control.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
89
Controls Displays
Activating a list and adjusting the Calling up information on the CID

setting (central information display)
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn Press and hold button on signal lever.
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding Information is displayed in the CID (central in‐
list. formation display) of the instrument cluster.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting. Information at a glance
2. Press the thumbwheel. Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
Display the CID (central information display):
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the navigation system.
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown. ▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Onboard computer
Indication in the info display Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
The information from the on‐
you can select what information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
board computer is to be displayed on the CID
info display in the instrument
(central information display) of the instrument
cluster.
cluster.
90
Displays Controls
On the Control Display: Distance to destination

1. "Settings" The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
2. "Instrument cluster"
gation system before the trip is started.
3. Select the desired information.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
Settings are stored for the profile currently tomatically.
used.
Time of arrival
Information in detail
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
Range
tered in the navigation system
Displays the estimated cruising range available before the trip is started.
with the remaining fuel.
The time must be correctly set.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
If there is only enough fuel left for less than
Speed Limit Info
45 miles/80 km, the color of the display Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
changes. Info.
Average fuel consumption Trip onboard computer

The average fuel consumption is calculated for The vehicle features two types of onboard
the period while the engine is running. computers.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
the distance traveled since the last reset by the often as necessary.
onboard computer. ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the Resetting the trip computer
engine manually stopped are not included in On the Control Display:
the calculation of the average speed.
1. "Vehicle info"
Resetting average values 2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come
to a standstill.
Display on the Control Display

Display the onboard computer or trip onboard
computer on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle info"
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
91
Controls Displays
Reset the fuel consumption or speed Activating/deactivating the speed

On the Control Display: warning
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" 1. "Settings"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 2. "Speed"
4. "Yes" 3. "Warning"
Sport displays Setting your current speed as the

speed warning
The concept On the Control Display:
On the Control Display, the current values for
1. "Settings"
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped. 2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
Displaying sport displays 4. Press the controller.
1. "Vehicle info" The current vehicle speed is stored as the
2. "Sport displays" speed warning.
Speed warning Settings on the Control

Display
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will Time
cause a warning to be issued.
Setting the time zone
General information 1. "Settings"
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed 2. "Time/Date"
drops below the set speed limit once by at
3. "Time zone:"
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
4. Select the desired time zone.
Displaying, setting or changing the The time zone is stored.
speed warning
On the Control Display: Setting the time
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. "Speed"
3. "Time:"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
are displayed.
is displayed.
Speed warning is stored.
92
Displays Controls
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ Language

nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller. Setting the language
The time is stored. To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Setting the time format
2. "Language/Units"
1. "Settings"
3. "Language:"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Select the desired language.
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format. used.
The time format is stored.
Setting the voice dialog
Automatic time setting Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, refer to page 27.
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically. Units of measurement
1. "Settings"
Setting the units of measurement
2. "Time/Date"
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
3. "Auto time set" distance and temperature:
Date 1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Setting the date 3. Select the desired menu item.
1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired unit.
2. "Time/Date" Settings are stored for the profile currently
3. "Date:" used.
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed. Brightness
Setting the brightness
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
and year.
The date is stored. 1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
Setting the date format 3. "Brightness"
1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
2. "Time/Date" ness is set.
3. "Format:" 5. Press the controller.
4. Select the desired format. Settings are stored for the profile currently
The date format is stored. used.
93
Controls Displays
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ Display visibility

ness settings may not be clearly visible. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
Assist system information
▷ Certain sitting positions.
Display on the Control Display ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐ ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
play. ▷ Wet roads.
1. "Settings" ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
2. "Control display" If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
3. "Driver assistance info"
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Activating/deactivating the display of Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
the current vehicle position up Display, refer to page 241.
If GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
Switching on/off
BMW ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐ 1. "Settings"
tedDrive customer portal. 2. "Head-Up Display"
1. "Settings" 3. "Head-Up Display"
2. "GPS tracking"
Display
3. "GPS tracking"
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display Head-up Display:
Concept ▷ Speed.
This system projects important information ▷ Navigation system.

into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. ▷ Check Control messages.
The driver can get information without averting ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
his or her eyes from the road. ▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
Overview
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
94
Displays Controls
3. "Displayed information" On the Control Display:

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up 1. "Settings"
Display.
3. "Rotation"
used.
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Setting the brightness is selected.
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the 5. Press the controller.
ambient brightness. Settings are stored for the profile currently
The basic setting can be adjusted. used.
Special windshield
1. "Settings" The windshield is part of the system.
2. "Head-Up Display" The shape of the windshield makes it possible
3. "Brightness" to display a precise image.
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ness is set. ages from being displayed.
5. Press the controller. For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ er’s service center or another qualified service
ally influenced using the instrument lighting. center or repair shop.

used.
Adjusting the height

1. "Settings"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
used.
Setting the rotation

The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
95
Controls Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Parking lights
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Low beams
and systems. When using these functions and Instrument lighting
must be observed.
Overview Parking lights, cornering

lights and roadside parking
Switches in the vehicle lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
Light functions riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
Symbol Function gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
Front fog lights
side parking lamp, refer to page 97.
Automatic headlamp control

Low beams
Position of switch:
Adaptive Light Control
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Lights off switched on.
Daytime running lights
96
Lights Controls
Roadside parking lights Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. Headlamp courtesy delay feature
Switching on General information

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for 4. Set length of time.
approx. 2 seconds. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Automatic headlamp control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
Welcome lights and
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
headlamp courtesy delay ness, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
feature precipitation.
Welcome lights General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
General information cause the lights to be switched on.
Depending on the equipment, when switching
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
off the vehicle, switch position or .
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐ ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
ual light functions may be switched on briefly,
The low beams always stay on when the fog
when the vehicle is unlocked.
lamp is switched on.
Activating/deactivating
Activating
Position of switch:
1. "Settings" The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is
2. "Lighting" illuminated when the low beams are switched
3. "Welcome lights" on.
97
Controls Lights
System limits To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
as a substitute for your personal judgment of er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
lighting conditions. Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
For example, the sensors are unable to detect tive Light Control consists of one or several
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐ systems:
der these conditions, you should always switch ▷ Cornering light, refer to page 98.
on the lights manually.
Activating
Position of switch with the ignition
Daytime running lights switched on.
General information Corner-illuminating lights

Position of switch: , , In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
The daytime running lights light up when the when turning, one of the two front fog lights is
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ inside of the curve is better lighted.
tion . The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
Activating/deactivating of turn signals.
In some countries, daytime running lights are When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ be automatically switched on regardless of the
vate the daytime running lights. steering angle.
Malfunction
1. "Settings"
A Check Control message is displayed.
2. "Lighting"
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
3. "Daytime running lamps" failed. Have the system immediately checked
Settings are stored for the profile currently by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
used. fied service center or repair shop.
Adaptive Light Control High-beam Assistant

The concept Concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ participants early on and automatically
tion of the road surface. switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
General information that the high beams are switched on, when‐
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
rameters, the light from the headlight follows speed range, the high beams are not switched
the course of the road. on by the system.
98
Lights Controls
General information ually switch off the high beams in situations

The system responds to light from oncoming where required to avoid a safety risk.
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. ing situations, and driver intervention may be
The driver can intervene at any time and switch necessary:
the high beams on and off as usual. ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
Activating ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
switch into position or . stickers, etc.
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument Fog lights
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on. Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
The high beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically. Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
switches on the high beams. page 97, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
Deactivating
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated when
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
manually switching the high beams on and off,
on.
refer to page 71. To reactivate the high-beam
Assistant, press the button on the turn signal
lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
99
Controls Lights
Instrument lighting Switching the reading lamps on and

off manually
Settings Press button.
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust Reading lights are located at the front and rear
the brightness. next to the interior lights.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel. Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Interior lights Selecting color scheme

General information On the Control Display:
Depending on the equipment, the interior 1. "Settings"

lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐ 2. "Lighting"
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
3. "Ambient:"
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
4. Select the desired setting.
trols brightness of some of these features.
With a color scheme selected and welcome
Overview lights activated they light up in the line's color
when vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
1 Interior lights 2. "Lighting"
2 Reading lights 3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
100
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
101
Controls Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

The head airbag system is designed as an bag cover panels, do not cover them or
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce modify them in any way.
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
through side windows during rollovers or side passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
impact events. tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
Knee airbag for GPS devices or mobile phones.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
impact. the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ that are not specifically suited for seats
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end with integrated side airbags.
collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
WARNING This also applies to steering wheel covers,
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ the dashboard, and the seats.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
airbag system cannot protect as intended or Even when you follow all instructions very
may cause additional injuries due to triggering. closely, injury from contact with the airbags
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐ cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
low the information on optimum protective ef‐
fect of the airbag system.◀ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
away from the side airbag. ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the thorized BMW service center.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep Warnings and information on the airbags are
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as also found on the sun visors.
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered. Functional readiness of the airbag
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ system
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support Safety information
them on the dashboard. WARNING
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐ Individual components can be hot after
imals or objects between an airbag and a triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
person. of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
102
Safety Controls
WARNING Safety information

Improperly executed work can lead to WARNING
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
floor area.◀
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Malfunction of the automatic

Correct function
deactivation system
When the ignition is switched on, the When transporting older children and adults,
warning lamp in the instrument cluster the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
lights up briefly and thereby indicates tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the operational readiness of the entire airbag the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
system and the belt tensioner. airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
Airbag system malfunctioning the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the and the indicator lamp goes out.
ignition is turned on. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
Automatic deactivation of the front- seat cushion
seat passenger airbags ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
Concept unless they are specifically determined to
The system reads if the front passenger seat is be safe for use on the front passenger
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ seat.
sistance. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ passenger seat if a child restraint system is
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ to be installed on it.
vated. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
General information
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
103
Controls Safety
Indicator lamp for the front-seat on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
passenger airbags er's seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats

WARNING
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ property damage. Make sure that the area of
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
front-seat passenger airbags. justment.◀
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
A corresponding message appears on the
ther activated or deactivated.
Control Display.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up 1. Press the switch and move the respective
when a child is properly seat all the way forward.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
ing system or when the seat
still moves forward slightly.
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
activated. The calibration procedure is completed when
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, the message on the Control Display disap‐
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient pears.
size is detected on the seat. The airbags If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
on the front passenger side are activated. peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
Detected child seats peat calibration, have the system checked as
The system generally detects children seated soon as possible.
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA at the point in time when the
vehicle was manufactured. After installing a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp
for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. Concept
This indicates that the child seat has been de‐
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
tected and the front-seat passenger airbags
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
are not activated.
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
passenger airbag
and tire temperature.
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
104
Safety Controls
General information All wheels are yellow

With use of the system observe further infor‐ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ several tires.
fer to page 196.
Gray wheels
Functional requirements The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
The system must have been reset with the for this may be:
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ▷ The system is being reset.
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
▷ Malfunction.
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the Status information
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
The status control display additionally shows
wheel change.
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
ensure that the system will operate properly. shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
Status display tions.
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ Resetting the system
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. Reset the system after each adjustment of the
On the Control Display: tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle info"
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" 1. "Vehicle info"
The status is displayed. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
Status control display 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
Tire and system status are indicated by the 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
color of the wheels and a SMS text message reset".
on the Control Display.
6. Drive away.
All wheels green The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus is displayed.
System is active and will issue a warning re‐
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐ After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
ing the last reset. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
One wheel is yellow completed automatically while driving.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in After a successfully completed Reset, the
the indicated tire. wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
105
Controls Safety
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When 2. At the next opportunity, e.g., gas station,
you continue the reset resumes automatically. check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires, if necessary.
Messages 3. Reset the system.
Required tire inflation pressure check Message in case of sharp tire inflation
message pressure loss
A Check Control message is displayed. The yellow warning lamp lights up.
▷ The system has detected a wheel In addition, a symbol with the affected
change, but no reset was done. tires will be displayed in the Check
▷ No reset was performed for the system. Control message.
System will issue a warning related to the
tire inflation pressures stored during the ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
last reset. flation pressure.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
specifications. The system issues a warning based on the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
A Check Control message is displayed. last reset.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen In these cases:
below the level of the last reset. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
In these cases: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
needed. normal tires or run-flat tires.
2. Reset the system. Run-flat tires, refer to page 204, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Message in case of low tire pressure letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
The yellow warning lamp lights up. WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
A Check Control message is displayed. ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss. a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
System will issue a warning related to the
continued driving with these tires.◀
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset. A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
In these cases: Dynamic Stability Control.
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.

Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
106
Safety Controls
Actions in the event of a flat tire The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
Normal tires conditions.
1. Identify the damaged tire. A vehicle with an average load has a possible
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g., driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
kit. ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires braking, a longer braking distance and different
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
not have been reset. In this case, perform style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
the reset. neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service Because the possible driving distance de‐
center or another qualified service center pends on how the vehicle is used during the
or repair shop. trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
or by changing the tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, WARNING
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In Your vehicle handles differently when a
this case, have the electronics checked at the run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
next opportunity and have them replaced, if tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
needed. reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
Run-flat tires change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
Maximum speed 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Continued driving with a flat tire
cate the final failure of a tire.
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
vers. dent.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at service center or another qualified service cen‐
the next opportunity. ter or repair shop.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires

System limits
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform The system does not function properly if a re‐
the reset. set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
Possible driving distance with complete loss of correct.
tire inflation pressure:
107
Controls Safety
The tire inflation pressure depends on the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
temperature falls again. These circumstances significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
may cause a warning when temperatures fall the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
very sharply. should stop and check your tires as soon as
The system cannot indicate sudden serious possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
tire damage caused by external circumstances. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
Malfunction tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
The yellow warning lamp flashes and vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
then lights up continuously. A Check note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
Control message is displayed. No flat proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
tected. even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
ing situations:
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
service center or another qualified service tor is combined with the low tire pressure
center or repair shop as needed. telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
dealer’s service center or another qualified minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
service center or repair shop. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
ing the area of the interference, the system
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
automatically becomes active again.
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
Declaration according to NHTSA/ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
System on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ to continue to function properly.
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
108
Safety Controls
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 3. "Perform reset"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
Concept 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss 6. Drive away.
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
The initialization is completed while driving,
tween the individual wheels while driving.
which can be interrupted at any time.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
The initialization automatically continues when
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
driving resumes.
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
Indication of a flat tire
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Functional requirements There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
The system must have been initialized when inflation pressure.
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
vers.
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Status display Run-flat tires, refer to page 204, are la‐
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can beled with a circular symbol containing the
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
whether or not the FTM is active. WARNING
On the Control Display: A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
1. "Vehicle info" ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
2. "Vehicle status"
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
The status is displayed. the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
Initialization continued driving with these tires.◀
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐ When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐ bility Control is switched on, if needed.
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures. System limits
Do not initialize the system when driving with A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
snow chains. four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
On the Control Display: check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
1. "Vehicle info"
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
2. "Vehicle status" vance.
109
Controls Safety
The system could be delayed or malfunction in have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the following situations: the system.
▷ When the system has not been initialized. Possible driving distance with complete loss of
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road tire inflation pressure:
surface. The possible driving distance with a flat tire
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction depends on cargo load, driving style and road
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). conditions.
▷ When driving with snow chains. A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Actions in the event of a flat tire A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
Normal tires braking, a longer braking distance and different
1. Identify the damaged tire. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.,
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
potholes, etc.
kit.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
the system.
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service WARNING
center or another qualified service center Your vehicle handles differently when a
or repair shop. run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
or by changing the tire. reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Run-flat tires
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
Maximum speed 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Continued driving with a flat tire cate the final failure of a tire.
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
vers. dent.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at ter or repair shop.
the next opportunity.
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
110
Safety Controls
Intelligent Safety Overview
The concept Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to
page 112. Intelligent Safety button
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 117.
Safety information Camera
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
WARNING Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
Due to system limits, individual functions ror clean and clear.
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
Switching on/off
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident. The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to cally active after every departure.
tow-starting/towing.◀ Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
111
Controls Safety
Front-end collision warning Detection range
Depending on the equipment, the collision

warning system consists of one of the two sys‐
tems:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 112.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
function, refer to page 114
Objects are responded to if they are detected

Approach control warning by the system.
with City light braking
function Safety information
Concept WARNING
The system can help prevent accidents. If an Indicators and warnings do not relieve
accident cannot be prevented, the system will the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
help reduce the collision speed. system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done intervene in the respective situations.◀
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror WARNING
controls the system. Due to system limits, individual functions
The approach control warning is available even can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
if cruise control has been deactivated. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
intentionally, the approach control warning and
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tow-starting/towing.◀
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
112
Safety Controls
Overview Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.
Button in the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Intelligent Safety button Display

If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
Camera ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear. Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
Switching on/off
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Switching on automatically The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Acute warning with braking function
Switching off Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Press button: the system is switched proaches another object at a high differential
off. The LED goes out. speed.
Re-press button: the system is switched on. The driver must intervene actively when there
The LED lights up. is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
113
Controls Safety
Acute warnings can also be triggered without ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
previous forewarning. them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
Braking intervention you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a The system may not be fully functional in the
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus following situations:
come to a complete stop. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ fall.
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may ▷ In tight curves.
be shut down. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ version, the field of view of the camera in
trol. the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
The braking intervention can be interrupted by scured.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
tively moving the steering wheel. gine via the Start/Stop button.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
the limitations of the detection range and func‐ ately after vehicle delivery.
tional restrictions.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
System limits
low in the sky.
Safety information
Warning sensitivity
WARNING
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
The system can react incorrectly or not such as the warning time, the more warnings
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of are displayed. However, there may also be an
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe excess of false warnings.
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Collision warning with
Detection range braking function
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or The concept
might come late. The system can help prevent accidents. If an
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ accident cannot be prevented, the system will
tected: help reduce the collision speed.
114
Safety Controls
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
ently if needed. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
The automatic braking intervention is executed intervene in the respective situations.◀
with limited braking force and for a brief period
WARNING
only.
Due to system limits, individual functions
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go, the front-end collision
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
dar sensor.
The front-end collision warning is available Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
even if cruise control has been deactivated. tow-starting/towing.◀
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking Overview
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions. Button in the vehicle
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
Objects are responded to if they are detected

by the system.
Safety information
WARNING
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐ Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
tem may not be output or they may be output structed.
115
Controls Safety
Switching on/off The driver must intervene actively when there

is a prewarning.
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every Acute warning with braking function
driving-off. Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Switching off proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out. The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
The LED lights up.
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
Setting the warning time previous forewarning.
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
Braking intervention
The detection of objects can be influenced by
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
technical system limitations, e.g. pedestrians
3. Activate the desired time on the Control or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐
Display. tion range and functional restrictions are to be
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ considered.
rently used. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
Warning with braking function ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
Display the brake pedal. The system can assist with
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ automatic braking intervention if there is risk of
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. cle to a complete stop.
Symbol Measure Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐

vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. be shut down.
Brake and increase distance. The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
signal sounds: acute warning.
trol.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
ver.
No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
Prewarning stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the tively moving the steering wheel.
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
116
Safety Controls
System limits Pedestrian warning with

Safety information
Approach control
WARNING Concept
The system can react incorrectly or not The system can help prevent accidents with
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of pedestrians.
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
the information regarding the system limits sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a
and actively intervene, if needed.◀ collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐
ing function.
Detection range The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
The system's detection potential is limited. controls the system.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late. General information
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ With sufficient brightness, the system warns
tected: about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
them at high speed.
before a collision.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. tem.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians. Detection range
▷ Stationary objects.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC ided into two areas:
OFF. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured. vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
Warning sensitivity left.
The more sensitive the warning settings are, A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
e.g., the warning time, the more warnings are cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within
cess of false warnings.
117
Controls Safety
the extended area only if they are moving in Camera

the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
intervene in the respective situations.◀ ror clean and clear.
WARNING
Switching on/off
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐ The system is automatically active after every
ing function. There is a risk of an accident. driving off.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀ Switching off
Press button: the systems are turned
Overview off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
Button in the vehicle LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intelligent Safety button
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
118
Safety Controls
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with Functional limitations
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a The system may not be fully functional or may
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus not be available in the following situations:
come to a complete stop.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ fall.
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
trol. windshield are dirty or covered.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ gine via the Start/Stop button.
tively moving the steering wheel. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Object detection can be restricted. Observe ately after vehicle delivery.
the limitations of the detection range and func‐ ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
tional restrictions. cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
System limits ▷ When it is dark outside.
Safety information
WARNING Lane departure warning
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of Concept
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
the information regarding the system limits you when the vehicle on streets with lane
and actively intervene, if needed.◀ markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
Detection range between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited. When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
ment cluster.
sued late.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
tected:
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. uation.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such The system does not provide a warning if the
because of the viewing angle or contour. turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
119
Controls Safety
Safety information ▷ On: the LED lights up.

WARNING ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system does not release the driver Settings are stored for the profile currently
from the personal responsibility to correctly used.
assess route and traffic situation. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to Display in the instrument cluster
the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ▷ Lines: system is activated.
actively intervene in the respective situations.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
In the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
was detected and warnings can be
jerk the steering wheel.◀
issued.
Overview
Issued warning
Button in the vehicle If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
Lane departure warning ▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
Camera ▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear. Functional limitations
Switching on/off
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
Press button.
120
Safety Controls
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane and the steering wheel vibrates.
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, Safety information
ice, dirt or water. WARNING
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. The system does not release from the
▷ When the lane markings are covered by personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
objects. bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
front of you. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
Overview
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Active Blind Spot Detection

The concept
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐

cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐ The radar sensors are located in the rear
med. bumper.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ Switching on/off
uations described above.
Press button.
121
Controls Safety
▷ On: the LED lights up. the information regarding the system limits
▷ Off: the LED goes out. and actively intervene, if needed.◀

used. Functional limitations
Display following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only

Prewarning The transmitter and receiver units comply with
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
blind spot or approaching from behind. erned by the following:
FCC ID:
Acute warning
▷ NBG009014A.
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly Compliance statement:
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
flashes brightly. Rules. Operation is subject to the following
The warning stops when the turn signal is two conditions:
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
critical zone. ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
Brief flashing received, including interference that may
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐ cause undesired operation.
locking serves as system self-test. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
System limits operate this equipment.
Safety information
WARNING
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
122
Safety Controls
Brake force display Function

The system is activated each time the engine
Concept is started and cannot be switched off.
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency After travel has begun, the system monitors
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
the risk of a rear-end collision. decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
General information This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
brake lights light up.
message is displayed in the Control Display
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner with the recommendation to take a break.
brake lights additionally light up.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
Attentiveness assistant a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or System limits
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous The function may be limited in the following
trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
recommended that the driver takes a break. rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
Safety information
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
WARNING about 43 mph/70 km/h.
The system does not release from the ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
personal responsibility to correctly assess rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
be detected in time. There is a risk of an acci‐ changing lanes frequently.
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and ▷ When the road surface is poor.
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
ditions.◀
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
123
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability
This chapter describes all standard, country- Control
series. It also describes features that are not Concept
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Within the physical limits, the system helps to
to the selected options or country versions. keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
This also applies to safety-related functions ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
and systems. When using these functions and the individual wheels.
must be observed. General information
Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐
lowing unstable driving conditions:
Anti-lock Braking System ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
ABS ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during can lead to understeering.
braking. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
The vehicle maintains its steering power even page 125, is a version of the DSC where for‐
during full brake applications, thus increasing ward momentum is optimized.
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ Safety information
gine. WARNING
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
Brake assistant traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
automatically produces the greatest possible situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided spective situations.◀
by ABS. WARNING
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal When driving with roof load, e.g., with
for the duration of the emergency stop. roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
124
Driving stability control systems Controls
Overview DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go

out.
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction

DSC OFF button Control
Concept
Indicator/warning lights DTC is a version of the DSC where forward
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ momentum is optimized.
trols the drive and braking forces. The system ensures maximum headway on
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
malfunctioned. e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
General information acceleration and when driving in curves.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Therefore, drive with appropriate caution.
reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
in curves. under the following special circumstances:
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
Deactivating DSC driving off from loose ground.
Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains.
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Traction Control
DSC is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Press button.
125
Deactivating DTC Variable sport steering

Press button again. The variable sport steering increases the
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ steering angle of the front wheels at large
tor lamp go out. steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
xDrive wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
parking and maneuvering.
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and Driving Dynamics Control
road surface.
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
Dynamic Damping Control tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
Concept The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
program.
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
Overview
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface Button in the vehicle
condition and driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
126
Operating the programs Activating SPORT+

Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
Button Program
appears in the instrument cluster and
DSC OFF the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
TRACTION
Automatic program change
SPORT+
When activating cruise control, the program
SPORT
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
COMFORT
ECO PRO Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Automatic program change The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
The system may automatically switch to COM‐ Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. SPORT
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Depending on the equipment, consistently
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ drivetrain for greater driving agility with maxi‐
TION or DSC OFF mode. mum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
DSC OFF specifications. The configuration is stored for
When DSC OFF, refer to page 125, is active, the profile currently used.
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves. Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Configuring SPORT
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 125, is
When the display is activated on the Control
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
Display, refer to page 128, the SPORT driving
celeration and when driving in curves.
mode can be set to individual specifications.
SPORT+ ▷ Activate SPORT.
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐ ▷ "Configure SPORT"
pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited ▷ Configure the SPORT driving mode.
driving stabilization. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. vated:
The driver handles several of the stabilization 1. "Settings"
tasks.
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
4. Configure driving mode.
127
This configuration is retrieved when the Displays

SPORT driving mode is activated.
Program selection
COMFORT Pressing the button displays a
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving list of the selectable programs.
stabilization. Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
Activating COMFORT strument cluster can differ from
Press button repeatedly until COM‐ the illustration shown.
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Selected program
In certain situations, the system automatically The instrument cluster displays
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic the selected program.
program change, refer to page 127.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 183, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for Display on the Control Display
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ Program changes can be displayed on the
zation. Control Display.
Comfort functions and the engine controller 1. "Settings"
are adjusted.
2. "Control display"
The program can be configured to individual
3. "Driving mode info"
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO

Drive-off assistant
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument Concept
cluster. This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO. Driving off with the drive-off assistant
2. "Configure ECO PRO" 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Make the desired settings.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
programs in Driving mode: held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
▷ SPORT, refer to page 127. For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
sions, the possible holding duration amounts
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 184. to 2 minutes.
128
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may

roll back slightly.
Servotronic
Concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.
129
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING

specific and optional features offered with the The system does not release from the
series. It also describes features that are not personal responsibility to correctly assess the
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
to the selected options or country versions. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
This also applies to safety-related functions situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
and systems. When using these functions and the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
systems, the applicable country provisions traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
must be observed. spective situations.◀
WARNING
Active Cruise Control with An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Stop&Go function, ACC cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel. ▷ Set the parking brake.
The system maintains the desired speed on ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐ turn the front wheels in the direction of the
celerates or brakes automatically. curb.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
adjusts the speed of your vehicle within the also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
given system limits so that the set distance to chock.◀
the vehicle ahead is maintained. WARNING
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐ justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
tive speed. of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits. WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
General information differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐
Depending on the driving settings, the features lowing situations:
of the cruise control can change in certain ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
areas. vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
130
Driving comfort Controls
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. Functional requirements

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in Speed range
the respective situations.◀ The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
Overview The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
Buttons on the steering wheel can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
Press but‐ Function tionary.
ton
Cruise control on/off, interrupt, Switching on/off and interrupting

refer to page 131 cruise control
Store, maintain speed, refer to Switching on

page 132
Press button on the steering wheel.
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 133 The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
Reduce distance, refer to
to the current speed.
page 132
Cruise control can be used.
Increase distance, refer to
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
page 132
Rocker switch: Switching off

Set speed, refer to page 132 To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Radar sensor Press button on the steering wheel.

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the ▷ If active: press twice.
vehicle. ▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
If interrupting the system while stationary,

press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ Automatic interruption

structed.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
131
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. The speed can also be stored by
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ pressing a button.
gaged. Press button.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated. Changing the speed
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for example, on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog. until the desired speed is set.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
system. road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
Setting the speed the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
Maintaining/storing the speed 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ Safety information
terrupted.
WARNING
When the system is switched on, the current The system does not release from the
speed is maintained and stored as the desired personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
speed. its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐ dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
to page 133. tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
132
Reduce distance ▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Brief status display
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 133. Selected desired speed.
Increase distance
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
sired distance is set. rently fulfilled.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐

Distance to vehicle ahead of you
tance, refer to page 133.
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
Continuing cruise control is shown.
Distance display
General information
Distance 1
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current Distance 2
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur. Distance 3
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off. Distance 4
▷ When the ignition is switched off. This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Calling up stored speed and distance The system has been interrupted or
Press button with the system distance control is temporarily sup‐
switched on. pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
Desired speed and stored speed pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
▷ Marking lights up green:
was detected.
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed. Detected vehicle
▷ Marking lights up orange: Symbol lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
marking indicates the stored
you.
speed.
133
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven Deceleration

away. The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐ e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
tor pedal, pressing the RES button or rocker of traffic congestion.
switch. The system also does not react in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
Symbol flashes orange: road users.
The conditions are not adequate for ▷ For red traffic lights.
the system to work. ▷ Stationary objects.
The system was deactivated but applies the ▷ For cross traffic.
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator ▷ For oncoming traffic.
pedal.
Swerving vehicles
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

System limits
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Detection range
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed.
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
134
Unexpected lane change the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐
tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
▷ On steep inclines.
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system ▷ From bumps in the road.
does not react to stopped vehicles. In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
Cornering
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e.g., if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.,
by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive engine power is insufficient.
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted Malfunction
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might The system cannot be activated if the radar
be detected late or not at all. sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred, e.g., during park‐
ing.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Cruise control
Concept
When you approach a curve the system may Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
135
The system maintains the desired speed. The Overview

system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed. Buttons on the steering wheel
General information Button Function

Depending on the driving settings, the features Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
of the cruise control can change in certain refer to page 136.
areas.
Store speed, refer to page 137.
Safety information
WARNING Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
The system does not release from the trol, refer to page 137.
personal responsibility to correctly assess the Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ page 137.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch Switching on/off and interrupting
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ cruise control
spective situations.◀
Switching on
WARNING Press button on the steering wheel.
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐ The marking in the speedometer is set to the
tions: current speed.
▷ On winding roads. Cruise control can be used.
▷ In heavy traffic. DSC will be switched on, if needed.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface. Switching off
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property Press button on the steering wheel.
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
▷ If active: press twice.
WARNING ▷ If interrupted: press once.
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐ The displays go out. The stored desired speed
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk is deleted.
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ Interrupting manually
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
136
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. Changing the speed

▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
until the desired speed is set.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
Setting the speed road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
Maintaining/storing the speed the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
terrupted. celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
speed. hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 138.
Continuing cruise control
The speed can also be stored by pressing a General information
button. An interrupted cruise control can be continued
Press button. by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
137
In the following cases, the stored speed value System limits

is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off. Engine power
▷ When the ignition is switched off. The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
Calling up stored speed engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained. Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
Indicator lamp
ble - then the object is reported through:
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ▷ Signal tones.
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
▷ Visual display.
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on. With appropriate equipment: obstacles on the
side of the vehicle that are detected by the
sensors of the parking assistant can also be re‐
Desired speed and stored speed ported by the PDC. See side protection, refer
▷ Marking lights up green: to page 140.
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired General information
speed. The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
▷ Marking lights up orange: tances are located in the bumpers.
system is interrupted, the The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
marking indicates the stored stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
speed. 6 ft/2 m.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
is switched off. ing situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
Brief status display ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
Selected desired speed.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the ▷ When a collision is imminent.
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors
rently fulfilled.
at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
138
Safety information ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,

bicycle racks.
WARNING
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
Switching on/off
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch The system switches on automatically in the
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ following situations:
spective situations.◀ ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
WARNING
The rearview camera also switches on.
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to ▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury obstacles are detected behind or in front of
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
PDC is not yet active.◀ You may turn off automatic activation for de‐
tected obstacles:
Overview 1. "Settings"
2. "Parking"
With front PDC: button in vehicle
3. Select setting.
used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
Park assistance button
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Ultrasound sensors
With front PDC: switching on/off
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
manually
e.g., in the bumpers.
Press park assistance button.

To ensure full functionality:
139
The rearview camera image is displayed when A display appears as soon as Park Distance
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the Control (PDC) is activated.
park assistance button. The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
WARNING
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
Signal tones
"Rear view camera"
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
With appropriate protection: side
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
protection
speaker.
Concept
The shorter the distance to the object, the
The system warns you about obstacles at the
shorter the intervals.
side of the vehicle by means of acoustic sig‐
If the distance to a detected object is less than nals or by displaying an appropriate warning on
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is the Control Display.
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in General information
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
continuous signal is sounded. PDC and parking assistant.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Display
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"

2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC" Side obstacles on the display of PDC.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting ▷ Color markings: warning against detected
is selected. obstacles.
6. Press the controller. ▷ Gray markings: the area was not yet re‐
Settings are stored for the profile currently corded.
used. ▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
Visual warning
Limits of side protection
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that The system only detects standing obstacles
are farther away are already displayed on the that entered the area of the sensors previously
Control Display before a signal sounds. when driving by.
140
The system detects if your vehicle is ap‐ ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
proaching the standing obstacle due to its own ▷ If cargo protrudes.
motion or steering angle.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐ can move into the blind area of the sensors
cle moves. If the vehicle is stationary, the before or after a continuous tone sounds.
markings are shown in gray after some time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly False warnings
captured.
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
System limits
stacle within the detection range:
Safety information ▷ In heavy rain.
WARNING ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered

with ice.
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe ▷ On rough road surfaces.
the information regarding the system limits ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
and actively intervene, if needed.◀ bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
Limits of ultrasonic measurement smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in rages.
the following situations: ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g., ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
coats. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ cleaners or neon lights.
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
machines. sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ tem is again fully functional.
aged or out of position. If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ washes, to reduce false alarms.
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other Malfunction
vehicles. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
▷ With moving objects. area on the Control Display.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
141
Surround View Park assistance button
Concept
Camera
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 142
▷ Side View, refer to page 144.
▷ Top View, refer to page 145.
Rearview camera The camera lens is located in the handle of the

tailgate.
Concept
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
The rearview camera provides assistance in necessary, clean the camera lens.
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display. Switching on/off
Safety information Switching on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if se‐
WARNING
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
The system does not relieve from the gine is running.
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Automatic deactivation during forward
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐ travel
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Switching on/off manually
Button in the vehicle Press park assistance button.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
142
Switching the view via iDrive Pathway lines depend on the current steering
With PDC activated or Top View switched on: angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Turning radius lines
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions. Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐ Turning radius lines show the course of the
tive at the same time. smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
▷ Parking aid lines
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
"Parking aid lines" the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
Lanes and turning radius are indicated. gle.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking" Obstacle marking
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image

of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ ings match the markings of the PDC.
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
143
Parking using pathway and turning System limits

radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ Detection of objects
dius lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the pathway line covers the corresponding Side View
turning radius line.
Concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Display settings
Safety information
Brightness WARNING
With the rearview camera switched on: The system does not relieve from the
1. Select the symbol. personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast situations.◀
With the rearview camera switched on:

144
Overview Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
Button in the vehicle on the Control Display.
Side View Guidelines at the bottom of the image show

the position of the front of the vehicle.
Cameras
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness"
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ 1. "Contrast"

ture the image. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
The two camera lenses are located on the ting is reached, and press the Controller.
sides of the bumper.
System limits
required, clean the camera lenses. The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Switching on/off
Top View
Switching on/off manually
Press button. The concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the doors and
Automatic deactivation during forward the road area around the vehicle are shown on
travel the Control Display for this purpose.
145
General information Cameras

The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
rearview camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Safety information
Cameras at the bottom in the mirror housings.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
situations.◀
Overview
Rearview camera
required, clean the camera lenses.
Switching on/off
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
Park assistance button
switch to the Top View:
"Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
146
Switching on/off manually Contrast

Press park assistance button. With Top View switched on:
▷ Off: the LED goes out. is reached, and press the controller.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed when Displaying the turning radius and
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the pathway lines
park assistance button. ▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
Display when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
Visual warning ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
The approach of the vehicle to an object can you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
be shown on the Control Display. tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
When the distance to an object is small, a red The lane line depends on the engaged
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in gear and the current steering angle. The
the PDC display. track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
A Check Control message is displayed in some
played, it is possible to switch to top view:
of these situations.
"Rear view camera"
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
147
Parking assistant the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch

traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
Concept spective situations.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
Overview

The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating. Park assistance button
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
Park Distance Control. Also observe the safety
information for PDC Park Distance Control. The four ultrasound sensors for measuring
parking spaces are located in the front and rear
Safety information on the side of the vehicle.
WARNING
The system does not release from the Functional requirements
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Ultrasound sensors
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic To ensure full functionality:
148
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers. The LED lights up.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
For measuring parking spaces
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Switching on with reverse gear
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
Shift into reverse.
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
The current status of the parking space search
Suitable parking space is indicated on the Control Display.
General information: To activate: "Parking Assistant"
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length

of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum System activated/deactivated
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road: Symbol Meaning
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: Gray: the system is not available.
your vehicle's length plus approx.
White: the system is available but
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
not activated.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
The system is activated.
Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. Parking space search and system
status
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ Symbol P, see arrow, on the vehicle depic‐
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the tion. Parking assistant is activated and
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal search for parking space active.
must be set where applicable.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
Switching on and activating
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
Switching on with the button
lighted.
Press park assistance button.
149
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is Interrupting manually

clearly detected, the system automatically The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the time:
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
▷ Press park assistance button.
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually. ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
Interrupting automatically
been taken over by system.
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ Parking space search is always active ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
whenever the vehicle is moving forward takes over steering.
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
activated. When the system is deactivated, the instruction on the Control Display.
the displays on the Control Display are ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
shown in gray. 6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
Parking using the parking assistant
surfaces.
Parking ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
1. Press park assistance button or shift ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐ appear.
sistant on, refer to page 149. Activate the ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
parking assistant, if needed. clearances that are too small.
Parking assistant is activated. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a ▷ If DSC is being deactivated.
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ When switching to another function on the
The status of the parking space search and Control Display.
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 149. A Check Control message is displayed.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐

Resuming
play.
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
The best possible parking position will tinued, if needed.
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
wheel move. page 149, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
Switching off
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if The system can be switched off as follows:
needed.
150
▷ Press park assistance button. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
▷ Switching off the ignition. machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
System limits aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
Safety information high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
WARNING treme heat or strong wind.
The system can react incorrectly or not ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of vehicles.
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
No parking assistance
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations: ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ When DSC is deactivated.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
Functional limitations can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
following situations: Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
be detected at all.
roads.
▷ On slippery ground. Malfunction
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the The parking assistant failed. Have the system
parking space. checked.
▷ With ditches or edges, e.g., an edge of a
port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
151
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 53 6 Temperature

2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 53
3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
Climate control functions in detail ▷ Rear window defroster.

▷ Seat heating.
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except
152
Climate control Controls
Switching off Depending on the selected temperature and

outside influences, the air is directed to the
Press the left button for the minimum
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
speed.
into the floor area.
The cooling function, refer to page 153, is
Temperature switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Turn the ring to set the desired gram.
temperature.
Recirculated-air mode
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
The automatic climate control reaches this rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed system then recirculates the air currently
by increasing the cooling or heating output, within the vehicle.
and then keeps it constant.
Press button repeatedly to select an
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ operating mode:
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
just the set temperature. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
Air conditioning nently blocked.
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐ mode switches off automatically after a certain
perature setting, warmed again. amount of time, depending on the environ‐
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with mental conditions.
the engine running. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
Press button. quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
Depending on the weather, the windshield and lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ needed.
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ Air flow, manual
cally with the AUTO program. Press the left or right side of the but‐
When using the automatic climate control, ton: decrease or increase air flow.
condensation water, refer to page 178, devel‐
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
duced automatically to save battery power.
normal.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
153
Manual air distribution Rear window defroster

Turn the wheel to select the de‐ Press button.
sired program or the desired in‐ The rear window defroster switches
termediate setting. off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
▷ Windows.
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
▷ Upper body region.
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
area.
maintenance, refer to page 220, of your vehi‐
▷ Floor area. cle.
Defrosting windows and removing

condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and if
needed, use the cooling function.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 53 4 Display

2 Temperature, left 5 Maximum cooling
3 AUTO program 6 Temperature, right
154
7 Seat heating, right 53 12 Air distribution, left

8 Air conditioning 13 Rear window defroster
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
lated-air mode clear
10 Air distribution, right 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity sation
Climate control functions in detail Press button.

Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Switching the system on/off
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
Switching on side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
Press any button except gine is started.
▷ Rear window defroster. The cooling function is switched on automati‐

cally with the AUTO program.
▷ Seat heating.
When using the automatic climate control,
Switching off condensation water, refer to page 178, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
Press the left button for the minimum normal.
speed.
Maximum cooling
Temperature Press button.
Turn the ring to set the desired The system is set to the lowest tem‐
temperature. perature, optimum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐

gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, The function is available above an external
by increasing the cooling or heating output, temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
and then keeps it constant. engine running.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ active.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature. AUTO program
Press button.
Air conditioning
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled ture are controlled automatically.
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐
perature setting, warmed again. Depending on the selected temperature, the
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with intensity of the AUTO program, and outside in‐
the engine running. fluences, the air is directed to the windshield,
155
side windows, upper body, and into the floor button to utilize the condensation sensor.
area. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
The cooling function, refer to page 155, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Air flow, manual
gram. To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ gram first.
trols the program so as to prevent window Press the left or right side of the but‐
condensation as much as possible. ton: decrease or increase air flow.
Intensity of the AUTO program The selected air flow is shown on the display of
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ the automatic climate control.
matic intensity control can be changed. The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
Press the left or right side of the but‐
power.
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display Manual air distribution

of the automatic climate control. Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode ▷ Upper body region.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ ▷ Floor area.
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle. ▷ Windows, upper body region and floor
area: driver's side only.
Press button repeatedly to select an
If the windows are fogged over, press the
operating mode:
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. sor.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
Defrosting windows and removing
outside air and shuts off automatically.
condensation
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the Press button.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
manently blocked. moved from the windshield and the front side
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐ windows.
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ For this purpose, point the side vents towards
tain amount of time in order to avoid window the side windows as needed.
fogging.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
active.
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases. If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
156
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
sor. interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Rear window defroster
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches Ventilation in the rear
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 220.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 1.
Ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
Front ventilation perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, Parked-car ventilation

arrow 1.
The concept
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐ needed.
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
The system can be switched on and off at any
Toward blue: colder. external temperature, either directly or by us‐
Toward red: warmer. ing two preset activation times. It remains
This does not change the set interior tem‐ switched on for 30 minutes.
perature for the driver and front passenger. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Adjusting the ventilation

▷ Ventilation for cooling:
157
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
158
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
to the selected options or country versions. ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
This also applies to safety-related functions tem to be controlled, the system is
and systems. When using these functions and generally compatible with the Universal
systems, the applicable country provisions Integrated Remote Control.
must be observed. If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Universal Integrated Remote
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Control
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Concept Corporation.
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled Control elements on the interior mirror
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The Universal Integrated Remote
Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate the remote control,
the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
▷ LED, arrow 1.
functions for the sake of security.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
Safety information ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
WARNING
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐ Programming
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of General information
property damage. Make sure that the area of 1. Switch on the ignition.
movement of the respective system is clear 2. Initial setup:
during programming and operation. Also follow
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
159
Controls Interior equipment
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
mirror. nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds.
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system,
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the universal remote control and the system
the interior mirror. The required distance also have to be synchronized.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system.
of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
transmitter and the button to be program‐ ond person.
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
Synchronizing the universal remote control
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
with the system:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held on the system being programmed. You
transmitter and repeat the step. Several have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
more attempts at different distances may 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐ interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
tween attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish
held transmitter was interrupted, hold synchronization. Once synchronization is
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ complete, the programmed function will be
edly press and release the hand-held carried out.
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
rior mirror buttons. be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
repeated programming, please check if the the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
system to be controlled features a rolling code quired distance depends on the hand-held
radio system. transmitter.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
160
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the idly. All stored functions will be deleted. The
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ functions cannot be deleted individually.
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The Digital compass
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐ Overview
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ 1 Control button
edly press and release the hand-held
2 Mirror display
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation Mirror display

WARNING The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
Operating concept
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of Various functions can be called up by pressing
property damage. Make sure that the area of the control button with a pointed object, such
movement of the respective system is clear as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
during programming and operation. Also follow The following setting options are displayed in
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐ succession, depending on how long the con‐
mitter.◀ trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
while the engine is running or when the ignition ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
is started. To do this, hold down the button ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
within receiving range of the system until the setting.
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Setting the compass zones
Deleting stored functions Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the
fer to World map with compass zones.
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
161
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more
pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
162
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ Emptying

mately 10 seconds. Take out the insert.
Lighter
Sun visor WARNING
Glare shield Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
Fold the sun visor down or up.
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
Vanity mirror
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the handle. Make sure that children do not use the
mirror lighting switches on. cigarette lighter and do not burn themselves,
e.g., by carrying the remote control with you
when exiting the vehicle.◀
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
NOTE
Ashtray If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
Opening property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Slide the cover forward.

Installing
The cigarette lighter is located between the

The ashtray can be inserted in both cup hold‐
cup holders.
ers.
163
Push in the lighter. Front center console

The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover.
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is Rear center console
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Remove the cover.
164
In the cargo area USB interface in the center console

In addition to the USB storage devices descri‐
bed above, additional mobile devices with USB
port can be connected to the USB interface in
the center console.
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
The socket is located on the left side in the serted.
cargo area. ▷ Audio devices with USB port, for example
MP3 player.
This allows further uses:
USB interface/AUX-IN port ▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing video films via USB video.
Concept
Information about compatible USB devices can
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
nected to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, e.g., a MP3 player, can Overview
be connected using the AUX-IN port.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the USB inter‐
face is located in the center console or in the
glove compartment.
USB interface in the glove

compartment
Mobile storage devices with USB port can be
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
connected to the USB interface in the glove
cated in the center armrest.
compartment.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 42.
▷ Loading of software updates.
▷ Adding music files to the music collection
and saving the music collection.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
165
Connecting an external device Through-loading system

Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Concept
nector into the USB interface. The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. down the rear seat backrest.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
mechanical damage. at a ratio of 60 to 40.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media With through-loading system: the rear seat
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐ backrest is divided into three parts at a
anteed that every device is operable on the 40/20/40 ratio.
vehicle. The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐ gether.
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the device owner's Safety information
manual. WARNING
▷ Due to the many different compression Danger of jamming with folding down the
techniques, proper playback of the media backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
stored on the USB storage device cannot property damage. Make sure that the area of
be guaranteed in all cases. movement of the rear backrest and the of the
▷ A connected USB storage device will be head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
supplied with charging current via the USB
WARNING
interface if the device supports this.
The stability of the child restraint system
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
adjustment or improper installation of the child
device via the onboard socket, when it is
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
connected to the USB interface.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
should be used, settings may be required just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
on the USB storage device, refer to the de‐ and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
vice owner's manual. seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
Non- compatible USB media: possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
▷ USB hard drives. straints or remove them.◀
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
166
Opening Fold down the middle section

1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
Reach into the recess and pull the middle sec‐

tion forward.
2. The unlocked backrest moves forward
slightly.
3. Fold backrest forward.
Closing
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
ter folding it back.◀
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright

seating position and engage it.
To secure cargo, refer to page 180, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
167
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 169.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 169.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
to the selected options or country versions. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
This also applies to safety-related functions console, refer to page 170.
and systems. When using these functions and ▷ Storage compartment between the rear
systems, the applicable country provisions seats, refer to page 170.
must be observed.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING Front passenger side
Loose objects or devices with a cable
Safety information
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while WARNING
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ Folded open, the glove compartment
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices the glove compartment can be thrown into the
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
vehicle's interior.◀ of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
NOTE
close the glove compartment immediately after
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can using it.◀
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Opening
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 168.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 169.
Pull the handle.
▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the
cup holders, refer to page 169. The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
168
Storage compartments Controls
Closing Front storage compartment

Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, refer to page 42, e.g.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a There is a storage compartment in the center
hotel, without the integrated key. console.
Driver's side
Safety information
Compartments in the doors
WARNING WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
the glove compartment can be thrown into the can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
of an accident or during braking and evasive objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀ Center armrest
Opening Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed. Fold the center armrest up.
169
Repositioning Front
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio

device
An external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, can be con‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
the USB audio interface in the
center armrest. Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
To open: slide the cover forward.
Storage compartment in the To close: slide the cover backward.
rear
A storage compartment is located in the center Rear
armrest. In the center armrest.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Cup holders
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
Safety information To open: press the button.
WARNING To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
NOTE
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐ rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
cup holder.◀
170
Clothes hooks Multi-function hook
Safety information Information

WARNING WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will of injury and risk of property damage. Only
not obstruct the driver's view.◀ hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
WARNING heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
Improper use of the clothes hooks can appropriately secured.◀
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk Overview
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
A multi-function hook is located on each side

of the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 180, there
Press on the top edge to fold open.
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
Storage compartments in the To secure the cargo, refer to page 180, the
cargo area floor net can also be used.
Storage compartment Storage compartment under the cargo

A storage compartment is located on the left floor panel
side. For the storage compartment under the cargo
A storage compartment is located on the right floor panel, do not exceed a maximum load of
side. 44 lbs/20 kg.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
171
Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch

at top, if needed, arrow 2.
172
173
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
specific and optional features offered with the From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
systems, the applicable country provisions Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
must be observed. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Breaking-in period Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ Brake system
other (break-in time). Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. formance between brake discs and brake
pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ riod.
trol.
Clutch
Safety information
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
WARNING level only after a distance driven of approx.
Due to new parts and components, 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
safety and driver assistance systems can react engage the clutch gently.
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle, Following part replacement
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐ The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of served if any of the components above-men‐
the respective parts and components.◀ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
176
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
General driving notes rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
Closing the trunk lid exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐ Hydroplaning
cle and can endanger occupants and other
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
form between the tires and road surface.
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the loss of contact between the tires and the road
tailgate open.◀ surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided: Driving through water
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
NOTE
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
When driving too quickly through too
▷ Drive moderately. deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
Hot exhaust system transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
WARNING age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
During driving operation, high tempera‐
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
ter.◀
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, When driving through water, observe the fol‐
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust lowing:
gas system, these materials can ignite. There ▷ Drive through calm water only.
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
not remove the heat shields installed and never
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀ Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
Mobile communication devices in the ard feature.
vehicle Perform an emergency stop in situations that
WARNING require such.
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
can influence one another. There is radiation any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
due to the transmission operations of mobile fort.
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
177
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from WARNING

the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its In idle state or with the engine switched
active mode. off, safety-relevant functions, e.g., engine
In certain braking situations, the perforated braking effect, braking force boost and steer‐
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐ ing assistance, are restricted or not available at
ever, this has no effect on the performance and all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive
operational reliability of the brake. in idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
Objects in the movement area around
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
pedals and floor area
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
WARNING brake efficiency.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit You can increase the engine's braking effect
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in if needed.
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use Brake disc corrosion
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor lowing circumstances:
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats ▷ Low mileage.
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀ used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Driving in wet conditions ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, agents.
gently press the brake pedal every few miles. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
Ensure that this action does not endanger a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
other traffic. sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them Condensation water under the parked
against corrosion. vehicle
In this way braking efficiency will be available When using the automatic climate control,
when you need it. condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Hills
WARNING Driving on racetracks
Light but consistent brake pressure can
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
vehicle is not designed for motorsports com‐
on the brake system.◀
petitive use.
178
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
This also applies to safety-related functions Determining the load limit
systems, the applicable country provisions 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
must be observed. hicle’s placard:
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
Safety information YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle
and unstable driving situations may result.
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, 2. Determine the combined weight of the
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while driver and passengers that will be riding in
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ your vehicle.
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices and passengers from XXX kilograms or
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the YYY pounds.
vehicle's interior.◀
4. The resulting figure equals the available
WARNING amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the E.g., if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ and there will be four 150 lbs passengers
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit in your vehicle, the amount of available
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs:
secure objects and cargo properly.◀ 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
179
Driving tips Loading
available cargo and luggage load capacity Lashing eyes in the cargo
calculated in Step 4.
area
Load
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area

for securing cargo.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
the occupants and the cargo. straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
The greater the weight of the occupants, the nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
less cargo that can be transported.
Floor net
Stowing and securing cargo To secure the cargo the floor net can also be
used.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of area floor.
the backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps. General information
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
180
Loading Driving tips
Safety information ▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
WARNING
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
bottom.
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., using
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk ratchet straps.
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC path of the tailgate.
when driving with roof load.◀ ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
Securing gently.
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof

drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
181
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass
This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof
specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due thereby reduces the range.
Tires
must be observed.
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
General information sumption.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and Check the tire inflation pressure
emission values. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip.
erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ronmental impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold
following use engine up to operating temperature.
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which

are no longer required following use.
Look well ahead when
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
182
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds road conditions, maintenance or environmental

factors.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ Switch off any functions that
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When are not currently needed
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds. Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
and-go traffic.
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed. Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 88. The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
Use coasting partially or completely.
When approaching a red light, take your foot

off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to Have maintenance carried
a halt.
out
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
Switch off the engine during For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 220.
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic ECO PRO
congestion.
Concept
Auto Start/Stop function ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐ on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a gine control and comfort features, e.g., the cli‐
stop. mate control output, are adjusted.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ matically decoupled from the transmission in
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
onds of switching off the engine. duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ D remains engaged.
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
183
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are Via iDrive

displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ 1. "Settings"
sumption driving style.
2. "ECO PRO mode"
The achieved extended range is displayed in
With respective equipment:
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
1. "Settings"
General information 2. "Driving mode"
The system includes the following 3. "Configure ECO PRO"
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 185. ECO PRO limit
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
page 185. An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
page 184. ▷ "Tip at:":
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving condition, refer Set the desired ECO PRO speed.
to page 186.
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to ECO PRO climate control
page 188. To activate ECO PRO climate control:
"ECO PRO climate control"
Overview
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the vehicle's interior, fuel consump‐
tion can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
Coasting
Driving Dynamics Control To activate coasting:
"Coasting"
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
Activating ECO PRO ing the engine and coasting with the engine
Press button repeatedly until ECO idling.
PRO is displayed in the instrument This function is only available in ECO PRO
cluster. mode.
Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
Configuring ECO PRO fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control ECO PRO potential savings

1. Activate ECO PRO. Shows potential savings with the current set‐
2. "Configure ECO PRO" tings in percentages.
184
Display in the instrument cluster Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
bar's color:
ECO PRO bonus range ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
An adjusted driving style helps as the mark moves within the blue range.
you extend your driving range. ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e.g., by
This may be displayed as the backing off the accelerator pedal.
bonus range in the instrument The display switches to blue as soon as all
cluster. conditions for driving with optimized fuel effi‐
The bonus range is shown in the range display. ciency.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
ECO PRO efficiency display
efficient, e.g., by backing off the accel‐
Display in the instrument cluster erator.
Activating the driving style indicator

and ECO PRO tips
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
To activate the indicator:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
Display in the instrument cluster with extended 3. "ECO PRO Info"
range
ECO PRO tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐

celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO

A mark in the efficiency display informs about PRO speed.
the current driving style.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
M/S to D.
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
celerating.
185
Symbol Measure ▷ Climate control output.

▷ Coasting.
Steptronic transmission/manual
transmission: follow shifting instruc‐
Display ECO PRO tips
tions.
"ECO PRO tips"
Manual transmission: engage neu‐ Settings are stored for the profile currently
tral for engine stop. used.
Coasting
Indications on the Control Display
Concept
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The function helps to conserve fuel.
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving. To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
1. "Vehicle info" sion when selector lever position D is set. The
2. "EfficientDynamics" vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
Displaying fuel consumption history lever position D remains engaged.
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
played within an adjustable time frame. ing.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
lected time frame. tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
Trip interruptions are represented below the again.
bar on the time axis.
General information
"Consumption history"
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
Adjusting the fuel consumption ing mode.
history time frame Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
1. Select the symbol. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
2. Adjust the time frame.
The function is available in a certain speed
Resetting fuel consumption history range.
1. Open "Options". A proactive driving style helps the driver to use

the function as often as possible and supports
2. "Reset consumption history"
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

The current efficiency can be displayed.
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
"EfficientDynamics info" a speed range from approximately
The following systems are displayed: 30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h if the
▷ Auto Start/Stop function. following conditions are met:
▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated.
186
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ Display in the instrument cluster with
tion D. extended range
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating The mark in the efficiency dis‐
temperature. play below the tachometer is
backlit in blue and is located at
Operation via shift paddles the zero point. The tachometer
approximately indicates idle
Concept speed.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift the zero point during coasting.
paddles.
Indications on the Control Display
Activating, deactivating coasting via shift The coasting driving condition is displayed in
paddles EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
1. Using the shift paddle + shift to the highest is active.
gear. The distance traveled in the coasting driving
2. Press shift paddle + again to enter coasting condition is indicated by a counter. The coun‐
mode. ter is reset prior to every departure.
To deactivate, press shift paddle - .
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:

driving condition coasting.

1. "Vehicle info"
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ 2. "EfficientDynamics"
ometer approximately indicates idle speed. 3. "EfficientDynamics info"
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting. Deactivating the function manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO menu, e.g., to use the braking
effect of the engine when traveling downhill.
used.
187
System limits Display on the Control Display

The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ If cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily
too low.
▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
excessive current. ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
ECO PRO driving style analysis The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
Concept the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
The function helps develop an especially effi‐ row 1.
cient driving style and to conserve fuel. The table of values contains stars. The more
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
The assessment is done in various categories cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
and is displayed on the Control Display. range increases, arrow 2.
Using this indication, the individual driving If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. stars is displayed.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
an efficient driving style. PRO tips are displayed during driving.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus Tips about the energy saving driving style,
range in the instrument cluster and on the Conserving fuel, refer to page 182.
Control Display.
Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
188
189
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap
Opening
series. It also describes features that are not 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due flap.
must be observed.
General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 194, prior to refueling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
192
Refueling Mobility
2. Close the fuel filler flap.

WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when

refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
193
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE

specific and optional features offered with the Do not press the Start/Stop button after
series. It also describes features that are not refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
to the selected options or country versions. There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
This also applies to safety-related functions fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
and systems. When using these functions and engines:
systems, the applicable country provisions ▷ Leaded gasoline.
must be observed.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
Fuel recommendation
ter or repair shop.◀
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations NOTE
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in tem and the engine. There is a risk of property
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier. damage. Do not use a fuel with a higher etha‐
nol percentage than recommended or one with
Gasoline other types of alcohol, e.g., M5 to M100.◀
General information NOTE

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ mum quality can compromise engine function
tent. or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
taining metal must not be used. not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of CAUTION
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
standards: tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
US: ASTM 4806–xx ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
194
Fuel Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to

purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
195
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
to the selected options or country versions. inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
This also applies to safety-related functions Monitor.
and systems. When using these functions and For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
systems, the applicable country provisions the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
must be observed. pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications

Tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 197, contains all tire inflation pressure
Safety information specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following: sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
▷ The service life of the tires. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
▷ Road safety.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
▷ Driving comfort. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation Tire inflation pressures up to
pressure impacts handling, such as steering 100 mph/160 km/h
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
month and before a long trip.◀
to page 197, and adjust as necessary.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient
temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
196
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.2 / 32 -

18 95 Y XL Std
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.2 / 32

18 99 Y XL Std
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 -

These pressure values can also be found on 89 Y RSC
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35
door pillar. 92 Y RSC
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. Front: 225/35 R 20 2.4 / 35 -
90 Y XL RSC
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 2.8 / 41
92 Y XL RSC
430i, 430i xDrive Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
in bar/PSI
Specifications in 440i, 440i xDrive

bar/PSI with cold
tires Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 Specifications in
M+S A/S RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/45 R 18 91 V tires
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
RSC
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
225/45 R 18 91 Y
M+S RSC
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S XL RSC
M+S RSC
225/40 R 19 93 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
91 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.2 / 32 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
95 Y RSC 91 Y RSC
197
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.4 / 35 Specifications in

95 Y RSC bar/PSI with cold
tires
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.2 / 32 -
18 95 Y XL Std
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.4 / 35 225/50 R 17 94 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
18 99 Y XL Std M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - M+S RSC
89 Y RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38
M+S A/S RSC
92 Y RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - RSC
90 Y XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.0 / 44 M+S XL RSC
92 Y XL RSC 225/40 R 19 93 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 -
M 4.2 / 60 91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.7 / 39
Tire inflation pressures at max. 95 Y RSC
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.4 / 35 -
WARNING 18 95 Y XL Std
In order to drive at maximum speeds in Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.7 / 39
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 18 99 Y XL Std
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ 89 Y RSC
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.7 / 39
92 Y RSC
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 -
90 Y XL RSC
430i, 430i xDrive Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.1 / 45
Without high-speed tuning feature 92 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
198
With high-speed tuning feature 440i, 440i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications Without high-speed tuning feature
in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications
Specifications in in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold Specifications in
tires bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

M+S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 M+S RSC
RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
225/45 R 18 95 V M+S A/S RSC
M+S XL RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y
Front: 2.4 / 35 - RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y 225/45 R 18 95 V
RSC M+S XL RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.7 / 39 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.9 /42 3.2 / 46

95 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.4 / 35 - Front: 2.5 / 36 -

18 95 Y XL Std 225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.7 / 39
18 99 Y XL Std Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41
95 Y RSC
Front: 2.4 / 35 -
225/40 R 19 89 Y Front: 225/45 ZR 2.5 / 36 -
RSC 18 95 Y XL Std
Rear: 255/35 R 19 2.7 / 39 Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41

92 Y RSC 18 99 Y XL Std
Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 - Front: 2.7 / 39 -

R 20 90 Y XL RSC 225/40 R 19 89 Y
RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.1 / 45
92 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41
92 Y RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 225/35 2.9 /42 -
T 135/80 R 17 4.2 / 60 R 20 90 Y XL RSC
102 M
199
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49

92 Y XL RSC 92 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Emergency Speed up to a max. of

T 135/80 R 17 50 mph / 80 km/h wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
102 M 4.2 / 60 T 135/80 R 17 4.2 / 60
102 M
With high-speed tuning feature
in bar/PSI Tire identification marks
Specifications in Tire size
bar/PSI with cold 245/45 R 18 96 Y
tires
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 R: radial tire code
M+S RSC
18: rim diameter in inches
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
RSC
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC Speed letter
Front: 2.5 / 36 - Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
225/45 R 18 91 Y R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
RSC
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
95 Y RSC
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.5 / 36 - V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
18 95 Y XL Std
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41 Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
18 99 Y XL Std
Front: 2.7 / 39 - Tire Identification Number

225/40 R 19 89 Y DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2116
RSC xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 xxx: tire size and tire design
92 Y RSC 2116: tire age
Front: 225/35 2.9 /42 - Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
R 20 90 Y XL RSC the U.S. Department of Transportation.
200
Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

DOT … 2116: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance.
21st week of 2016. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering,
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
least every 6 years.
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
ture A
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA A B C vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
Temperature A B C tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to required by law.
these grades.
WARNING
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 in combination, can cause heat buildup and
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well possible tire failure.◀
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends RSC – Run-flat tires
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 204, are labeled
ever, and may depart significantly from the with a circular symbol containing the letters
norm due to variations in driving habits, service RSC marked on the sidewall.
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Traction
weather performance than summer tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
201
Tire tread ioning between the wheel and the road. Be

careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
Summer tires speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐ ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
ches/3 mm. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Winter tires Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than curbs, road damage, or similar things.
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires Safety information
are less suitable for winter operation. WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
Minimum tread depth
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐ pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
ches/1.6 mm. control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
They are marked on the side of the tire with placed.◀
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Changing wheels and tires

Tire damage
Mounting
General information
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign out by a dealer’s service center or another
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. qualified service center or repair shop.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles Wheel and tire combination
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur other qualified service center or repair shop
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
202
about the correct wheel/tire combination and Retreaded tires

wheel rim versions for the vehicle. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair ommend the use of retreaded tires.
the function of a variety of systems such as
WARNING
ABS or DSC.
Retreaded tires can have different tire
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
Following tire damage, have the original wheel not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Winter tires
WARNING Winter tires are recommended for operating on
Wheels and tires which are not suitable winter roads.
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐ Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
cle, e.g., due to contact with the body due to vide better winter traction than summer tires,
tolerances despite the same official size rating. they do not provide the same level of perform‐
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐ ance as winter tires.
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐ Maximum speed of winter tires
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
vehicle type.◀
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a corresponding information label/
Recommended tire brands sticker in the field of view. The label is available
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
tire brands. These can be identified by a star ble from a dealer’s service center or another
on the tire sidewall. qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles

New tires
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
and rear axles depending on individual driving
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
they achieve their full traction potential after a
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
break-in time.
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
Drive conservatively for the first ter or another qualified service center or repair
200 miles/300 km.
203
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure Repairing a flat tire
and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐ Safety measures
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
rim sizes on the front and rear axles. from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
Storage
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
setting the parking brake.
as little exposure to light as possible.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
grease and fuels.
and engage the steering wheel lock.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
Run-flat tires
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Label
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ inflation pressure.
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims. General information
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the lity System found on the compressor and
event of a tire inflation pressure loss. sealant container.
Follow the instructions for continued driving ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
with a flat tire. tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
Changing run-flat tires ▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No other qualified service center or repair
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
additional questions at any time. that have penetrated the tire.
204
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant 6 Connector/cable for socket
container and apply it to the steering
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
wheel.
of the compressor
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐ Filling the tire with sealant
nity and have them replaced, if needed. 1. Shake the sealant container.
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
2. Take the connection hose completely out

of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐

tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
1 On/off switch
2 Holder for sealant container
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
205
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, switch on the compressor.
ing that it engages audibly.
DANGER
5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
valve of the nonworking wheel. tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
6. With the compressor switched off, insert tended operation. There is a risk of property
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ damage. Do not run the compressor for more
hicle. than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
206
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be 3. Attach the connection hose directly to the
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐ compressor.
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System

1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐
nection hose in suitable material to avoid 4. Insert the connector into the power socket
dirtying the cargo area. inside the vehicle.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
1. Stop at a suitable location. turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire
valve stem. ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
207
Snow chains Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
Fine-link snow chains when using snow chains.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the Changing wheels/tires
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable. General information
Information regarding suitable snow chains is When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ does not always need to be changed immedi‐
other qualified service center or repair shop. ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat
tire.
Use If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
WARNING available as accessories from a dealer’s service
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
pair shop.
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
Safety information
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by WARNING
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow,
snow chains.◀ ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away.
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the
with the tires of the following size: tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐
face.◀
▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18. WARNING
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ The vehicle jack is only provided for
tions. short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
Make sure that the snow chains are always
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
structions.
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after start the engine.◀
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings. WARNING
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
in incorrect readings. vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
Dynamic Traction Control, if needed. jack.◀
208
WARNING On slight down-hill grades

If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
designated jacking point, damage to the vehi‐
cle may occur while cranking the vehicle up, or
the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the vehicle jack is inserted into the jacking
point next to the wheel house while cranking
the vehicle up.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling If a wheel needs to be changed on a slight

down-hill grade, place wheel chocks or other
General information suitable objects, e.g. a stone, under the wheels
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐ of the front and rear axle.
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
Preparing the vehicle
On a level surface ▷ Change the wheel as far away as possible
from passing traffic.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid, non-slip and level
ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐ side the immediate area in a safe place,
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel such as behind a guardrail.
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
you wish to change.
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
209
Jacking points for the vehicle jack position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.◀
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

cated at the positions shown. 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
Jacking up the vehicle wheel to be changed.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the crank, arrow 2, with
the other hand.
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed
when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk
of injury. Comply with the described hand
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the

crank clockwise.
210
4. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐ 4. Turn the crank of the vehicle jack counter‐
tended vertically. clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands under the cargo floor panel because of its
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the size.
jacking point after extending the vehicle
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
jack.
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
6. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire

surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount a maximum of one emergency wheel.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and hand-tighten at least two bolts in a
crosswise pattern.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
211
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 7 Coolant reservoir

2 Vehicle identification number Depending on the engine installation, the
3 Washer fluid reservoir coolant reservoir is located on the right
side or the left side of the engine compart‐
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
ment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Oil filler neck
212
Engine compartment Mobility
Hood with the wiper blades mounted are folded

down onto the windshield before opening the
Safety information hood.◀
WARNING
Opening the hood
Improperly executed work in the engine
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a Hood is unlocked.
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
move with the vehicle switched off, e.g., the ra‐ again, arrow 2.
diator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach Hood can be opened.
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀ Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
WARNING
message is displayed.
There are protruding parts, e.g., locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk Closing the hood
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐ Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐ 16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of fully.
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀ The hood must engage on both sides.
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
213
Mobility Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement
Status display
Concept
to the selected options or country versions. The engine oil level is monitored electronically
This also applies to safety-related functions while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
and systems. When using these functions and play.
systems, the applicable country provisions If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
must be observed. level, a Check Control message is displayed.
Requirements
General information A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
the driving style and driving conditions.
is displayed.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
the following situations, for example:
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine. Via iDrive:
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐ 1. "Vehicle info"
fied as not suitable.
2. "Vehicle status"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
3. "Engine oil level"
after refueling.
The engine oil level is displayed.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
Engine oil level display messages
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
Different messages appear on the display de‐
uring principles:
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
▷ Status display. to these messages.
▷ Detailed measurement. If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil.
A red indicator lamp indicates too high
engine oil pressure.
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
214
Engine oil Mobility
Take care not to add too much engine oil. 3. "Measure engine oil level"
NOTE 4. "Start measurement"
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ The engine oil level is checked and displayed
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk via a scale.
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐ Time: approx. 1 minute.
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐ Adding engine oil
pair shop.◀
General information
Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
Concept to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
In the detailed measurement the engine oil played in the instrument cluster.
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary, Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
and displayed via a scale. cle before engine oil is added.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum Take care not to add too much engine oil.
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ Safety information
creased somewhat.
WARNING
General information Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,

coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
A detailed measurement is only possible with
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
certain engines.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
Requirements eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. erating materials into different bottles. Store
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral operating materials out of reach of children.◀
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
NOTE
depressed.
An engine oil level that is too low causes
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
engine damage. There is a risk of property
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
damage.
tor pedal not depressed.
Add engine oil within the next
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
125 miles/200 km.◀
perature.
NOTE
Performing a detailed measurement
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
In order to perform a detailed measurement of gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
the engine oil level: of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
1. "Vehicle info" gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
2. "Vehicle status"
215
Mobility Engine oil
center or another qualified service center or re‐ Suitable engine oil types
pair shop.◀ You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Overview
Gasoline engine
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 212. BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 213.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise. suitable for particular gasoline engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils is available
at a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
3. Add engine oil. added:
Gasoline engine
Engine oil types to add BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.

General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine. Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
Safety information When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
NOTE the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. Alternatively, also en‐
Oil additives can damage the engine.
gine oils with viscosity grades SAE 5W-20,
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can
oil additives.◀
be used.
NOTE The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐ 5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines.
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
of property damage. When selecting an engine ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐ quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
rect oil rating.◀ other qualified service center or repair shop.
216
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil change

NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
217
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options Coolant level
General information
series. It also describes features that are not The coolant level is indicted using minimum
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due and maximum markings. Depending on the
to the selected options or country versions. coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
This also applies to safety-related functions markings are located at different locations.
systems, the applicable country provisions Overview
must be observed. Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
General information
Checking the coolant level on the side
Not all commercially available additives are markings
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
1. Let the engine cool.
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
repair shop. tween the minimum and maximum marks.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Safety information
Symbol Meaning
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ Maximum
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
Minimum
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
218
Coolant Mobility
Checking the coolant level in the filler Adding

neck 1. Let the engine cool.
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
coolant reservoir. counterclockwise to allow any excess
1. Let the engine cool. pressure to dissipate, then open it.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
in the filler neck. nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
219
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
This also applies to safety-related functions Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
and systems. When using these functions and control with which the vehicle was driven most
systems, the applicable country provisions recently.
must be observed.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
erational reliability of the vehicle. update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
according to the country-specific version. Re‐ crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
Service and Warranty
service center or repair shop. Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Condition Based Service Canadian models
CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
amount of maintenance corresponding to your that maintenance and repair be performed by a
user profile. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Information on service requirements can be service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
displayed on the Control Display. lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
220
Maintenance Mobility
Socket for OBD Onboard ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
Diagnosis
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
Safety information firing in the engine.
NOTE Reduce the vehicle speed and have the

system checked immediately; otherwise,
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
intricate component intended to be used in riod can seriously damage emission con‐
conjunction with specialized equipment to trol components, in particular the catalytic
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. converter.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
221
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 73, the wiper arms.
series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
to the selected options or country versions. fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the

catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
NOTE
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the Folded-away wipers can be jammed
right side in the cargo area in a storage com‐ when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
partment. Open the cover. property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
Lamp and bulb replacement
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield General information
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐ Lights and bulbs
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
tion to vehicle safety.
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
222
Replacing components Mobility
er’s service center or another qualified service Safety information

center or repair shop.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s Lights and bulbs
service center or another qualified service cen‐ WARNING
ter or repair shop.
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
Observe the safety information, refer to tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
page 223. risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting WARNING
diodes installed behind a cover as a light Work on switched-on lighting systems
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
related to conventional lasers, are officially jury or risk of property damage. When working
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
Observe the safety information, refer to question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
page 223. turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Headlight glass
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐ cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
densation evaporates after a short time. The its base.◀
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
Xenon headlights
increasing humidity forms, e.g., water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle DANGER
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s There can be high voltage in the lighting
service center or another qualified service cen‐ system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
ter or repair shop. turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
Headlight setting placement be performed by a dealer’s service
The headlight adjustments can be affected by center or another qualified service center or re‐
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight pair shop.◀
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
pair shop.
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
223
Front lights, bulb replacement Turn signal

Observe the safety information, refer to
Xenon headlights page 223.
24-watt bulb, PY24W
Information
DANGER 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
pair shop.◀
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the

likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
contact a dealer’s service center or another socket counterclockwise and remove.
qualified service center or repair shop.
Headlamps
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

counterclockwise and remove.
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with LED headlights
xenon technology.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology. All front lamps and side turn signals are de‐
signed with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐ In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop. service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
224
Headlamps Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐

wise.
Remove the bulb.
1 Cornering light
2 Low beams/headlight flasher
3 High beams/headlight flasher 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
and screw on the wheel house panel.
4 Parking lights / daytime running lights
5 Turn signal LED front fog lights
6 Side marker lights These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
Contact your service center in the event of a
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
malfunction.
Halogen front fog lights

Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
page 223.
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
35-watt bulb, H8. contact a dealer’s service center or another
1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the qualified service center or repair shop.
onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1. Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Carefully pull back the wheel house panel,
arrow 2. Overview
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. 1 Turn signal
Turn the bulb, arrow 2. 2 Reversing lamp
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. 3 Inside brake lamp
225
4 Tail lamps 4. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver

handle, arrows.
5 Outside brake lamp
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
page 223.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL.
The tail lamps feature LED technology. In the 5. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s serv‐ row 1, and carefully pull it backward and
ice center or another qualified service center or out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it
repair shop. in place in order to prevent the tail lamp
from coming loose suddenly. Make sure
Removing the exterior tail lamp that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the
centering pin.
1. Open tailgate.
2. Loosen and remove the mounting pin of
the cover, arrow 1, with the screwdriver
from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐

nector of the connecting line and remove
the connector from the bulb holder.
3. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ Replacing the bulbs
hicle tool kit to press in the latch, arrow 2,
1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on
and remove the cover, arrow 3.
the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
226
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the Accessing the lights
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 1. If needed, remove warning triangle, refer to
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the page 232, and bracket with the screw‐
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, re‐
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ fer to page 222.
teners. 2. Remove the emergency release and the
wire cable from the handle.
Installing the tail lamp
3. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
1. Connect the connecting line to the tail hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip. move the screws on the trim.
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1 and the inner part onto the centering
component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
4. Press together hinge trim, see arrow, to re‐

lease the clips.
Grasp the trim, pull the hinge trim down‐
ward and remove it.
4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.

5. Insert and secure the cover. Make sure that
the tubular seal is not pinched.
Lights in the tailgate

5. Carefully loosen the trim from the tailgate,
General information
starting at the edge and working toward
Observe the safety information, refer to the area around the recessed grips. Make
page 223. sure that the trim does not become stuck.
Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, PW16W. 6. Carefully swing out the trim.
Inner brake lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W
All lights in the tailgate are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
227
Replacing the reversing lights and inner 5. Install the wire cable on the handle and en‐
brake lights gage the handle on the holder.
1. Loosen the bottom holder, arrow 1. 6. Install the holder for the warning triangle.
7. Apply the warning triangle.
Tail lamps, license plate lamps and

center brake lamps
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
2. Loosen the top holder, arrow 2. To do so,

press in the middle latch and then press Vehicle battery
out both outside latches.
Remove the lamp holder, arrow 3.
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
3. Unscrew the nonworking bulb of the re‐
versing or brake lamp from its socket The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
counterclockwise. service life of the battery.
4. Insert the new bulb. More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Installing the bulb holder other qualified service center or repair shop.
1. Insert the two contacts, arrow 1, into the
connections, arrow 2.
Battery replacement
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
2. Press on the bulb holder, arrow 3. Make After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
sure that the two exterior holders latch into of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
place. battery be registered on the vehicle by a deal‐
3. Swing the trim back onto the tailgate and er’s service center or another qualified service
secure. center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort
features are fully available and that any Check
4. Place the hinge trim over the hinge and
Control messages of these comfort features
push it up until the retaining pin engages.
are no longer displayed.
Close the clips.
228
Charging the battery Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a
General information dealer’s service center or another
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ qualified service center or repair shop
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery or take them to a collection point.
remains usable for its full service life.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
A discharged battery is indicated by a transport and storage. Secure the battery so
red indicator lamp. that it does not tip over during transport.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐

lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
Fuses
drives.
General information
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
month.
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
Safety information
NOTE Safety information
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery WARNING
can work with high voltages and currents,
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
In the engine compartment
Starting aid terminals 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 233, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
the system.
229
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.

4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers

1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the

three screws.
In the cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
230
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

must be observed.
SOS button in the roofliner
Hazard warning flashers Requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
The button is located in the center console. button lights up green.
The red lamp in the button flashes with the ▷ The LED illuminates green when the Emer‐
hazard warning flashers switched on. gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
Intelligent emergency call
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
Concept until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
General information established.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. When the Emergency Request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
Response Center contacts you and takes
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
further steps to help you.
ditions.
231
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Even if you are unable to respond, the Warning triangle

BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
the tailgate.
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ First-aid kit
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ General information
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS Some of the articles have a limited service life.
button.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Storage
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐
side Assistance can be established directly.
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area in a
storage compartment.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
232
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐

bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
To prevent personal injury or damage to both partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ nal.
dure. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
Preparation
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery. The body ground or a special nut acts as the
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ battery negative terminal.
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power Connecting the cables
consumers in both vehicles.
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
Starting aid terminals
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
WARNING jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
If the jumper cables are connected in the battery, or to the corresponding starting
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order tance.
during connection.◀ 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
233
corresponding engine or body ground of ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no

the vehicle to be started. power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
Starting the engine steering.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine. ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
creased idle speed. than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
cle's response.
started in the usual way.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
30 mph/50 km/h.
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
charged battery to recharge. 30 miles/50 km.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.

Tow truck
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order. With rear-wheel drive
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing

Safety information
WARNING
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐ truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to NOTE
tow-starting/towing.◀ When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
Manual transmission on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
Information the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
234
With xDrive Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform. loading platform.
NOTE NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐ When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
only be transported on a loading platform.◀ damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
NOTE Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
Pushing the vehicle
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀ To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever
Steptronic transmission: transporting
position N.
the vehicle
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
General information ceed as follows:
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Depress brake pedal.
Safety information
3. Engage selector lever position N.
NOTE
If there is a malfunction, it may happen that
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐ you cannot change the selector lever position.
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, re‐
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
fer to page 78, if needed.
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
235
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐ Tow fitting

tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window. General information
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
towed.◀ ried in the vehicle.
NOTE The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐ or rear of the vehicle.
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐ refer to page 222, are together in the cargo
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow area.
fitting.◀ Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
Tow bar vehicle and screw it all the way in.
The tow fittings used should be on the same ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
side on both vehicles. roads only.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting ▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe positioning the vehicle.
the following:
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it Safety information
is secured with an offset.
NOTE
Tow rope If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
tow fitting. There is a risk of property damage.
that the tow rope is taut.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
236
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 232. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 65.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
237
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
specific and optional features offered with the Automatic vehicle washes
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Safety information
This also applies to safety-related functions NOTE
and systems. When using these functions and Water can penetrate in the windshield
systems, the applicable country provisions area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
must be observed. risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
washers.◀
NOTE
Vehicle washes
Improper use of automatic vehicle
General information washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of property damage. Information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
the following instructions:
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised. ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
avoid paint damage.
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle. ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
Steam blaster and high-pressure the chassis.
washer ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
NOTE the exterior mirrors.
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐ ▷ Deactivate rain sensor, if necessary, to
ers, components can be damaged due to the avoid damage to the wiper system.◀
pressure or temperatures being too high. If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
sufficient distance and do not spray too long washes, to reduce PDC false alarms.
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀ Before driving into a vehicle wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
Distances and temperature vehicle wash, take the following steps:
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. Manual transmission:
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
1. Drive into the vehicle wash.
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
2. Shift to neutral.
238
Care Mobility
3. Switch the engine off. Headlamps

Steptronic transmission: ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
1. Drive into the vehicle wash.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied, e.g.,
2. Engage selector lever position N.
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
3. Switch the engine off. with water.
In this way, the ignition remains switched ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ ice scraper.
played.
NOTE After washing the vehicle
Selector lever position P is automati‐ After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
cally engaged when the ignition is briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
switched off. There is a risk of property can be reduced. The heat generated during
damage. Do not switch drive-ready state braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
off in vehicle washes.◀ protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
wiper blade wear.
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Exiting a vehicle wash Vehicle care

To start the engine with manual transmission: Vehicle care products
1. Make sure that the vehicle key is in the ve‐
hicle. General information
2. Press on the clutch pedal. BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW.
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ Safety information
sion:
WARNING
1. Make sure that the vehicle key is in the ve‐
Cleansers can contain substances that
hicle.
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
2. Depress the brake pedal. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
3. Press the Start/Stop button. terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Selector lever position Vehicle paint

Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ Regular care contributes to driving safety and
cally: value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
239
Mobility Care
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ Safety information

quency and extent of your vehicle care to
NOTE
these influences.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
tered or discolored.
Leather care Caring for special components

Remove dust from the leather often, using a
Light-alloy wheels
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
wear and premature degradation of the leather
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
surface.
turer's instructions.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
roughly every two months.
components, such as the brake disk.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
them. The heat generated during braking dries
more visible.
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and against corrosion.
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface. Chrome surfaces
Suitable care products are available from a Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
service center or repair shop. of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
Upholstery material care salt.
General information Rubber components

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Environmental influences can cause surface
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth only water and suitable cleaning agents for
with a suitable interior cleaner. cleaning. The manufacturer of your vehicle
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using recommends original BMW care products.
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
material vigorously. care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
240
Care Mobility
Fine wood parts Carpets and floor mats

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ WARNING
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
soft cloth.
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
Plastic components the vehicle such that they are secured and
NOTE cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐ mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
cloth lightly with water.◀ are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle's
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
interior for cleaning.
▷ Roofliner.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
▷ Lamp lenses. microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
▷ Instrument cluster cover. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
▷ Matt black spray-coated components. forth in the direction of travel only.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.

Sensor/camera lenses
Clean with a microfiber cloth. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
Dampen cloth lightly with water. cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
Do not soak the roofliner. detergent.
Safety belts Displays/Screens/protective glass of

the Head-up Display
WARNING
NOTE
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or any kind can damage the surface of displays
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
for cleaning the safety belts.◀ age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety. NOTE
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety The surface of displays can be damaged
belts clipped into their buckles. with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
belts until they are dry. and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Head-up Display:
241
Mobility Care
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐

play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
242
Care Mobility
243
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in this cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. center or another qualified service center or re‐
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, pair shop.
e.g., due to the selected special equipment, The information in the vehicle documents al‐
country version or country-specific measure‐ ways has priority over the information in this
ment method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual.
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
model version, equipment or country-specific the selected special equipment, tires, load and
measurement method. chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
BMW 4 Series Coupe
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.4/2,017
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.9/1,825
Height inches/mm 54.2-54.8/1,377-1,392
Length inches/mm 182.6/4,639
Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1-38.8/11.3-11.8
246
Technical data Reference
Weights
430i
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,431/2,010

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,475/2,030
Load lbs/kg 789/358
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,072/940
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,072/940
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,491/1,130
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 15.7
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445
440i
Load lbs/kg 789/358
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,172/985
430i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,619/2,095
Load lbs/kg 789/358
247
Reference Technical data
430i xDrive
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,194/995
440i xDrive
Load lbs/kg 789/358
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 15.8/60.0 Fuel quality, refer to

page 194
248
Appendix Reference
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
249
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All-season tires, see Winter Automatic transmission, see
tires 203 Steptronic transmission 75
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-wheel-drive 126 Automatic vehicle wash 238
tem 124 Alternative oil types 216 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
ACC, Active Cruise Control Ambient light 100 mate control 155
with Stop&Go function 130 Antifreeze, washer fluid 73 AUTO program, climate con‐
Acceleration Assistant, see Antilock Brake System, trol 153
Launch Control 78 ABS 124 AUTO program, intensity 156
Accessories and parts 8 Anti-slip control, see Auto Start/Stop function 67
Activated-charcoal filter 157 DSC 124 Auto washing 238
Activation times, parked-car App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6 AUX-IN port, general informa‐
ventilation 158 Approach control warning tion 165
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ with City light braking func‐ Average fuel consumption 91
tion 121 tion 112 Average speed 91
Active Cruise Control with Approved axle load 247 Axle loads, weights 247
Stop&Go function, Arrival time 91
ACC 130 Ashtray 163 B
Adaptive brake lights, see Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
Brake force display 123 tance 232 Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
Adaptive Light Control 98 Assistance when driving bar support 52
Additives, oil 216 off 128 Backrest, width 52
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Assist system information, on Band-aids, see First-aid
straints 50 Control Display 94 kit 232
After washing vehicle 239 Attentiveness assistant 123 Battery replacement, vehicle
Airbags 101 AUTO intensity 156 battery 228
Airbags, indicator/warning Automatic climate con‐ Battery replacement, vehicle
light 102 trol 152 remote control 36
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic climate control Battery, vehicle 228
lated-air mode 153, 156 with enhanced features 154 Being towed, see Tow-start‐
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐ Automatic cruise control with ing and towing 234
ing function 153, 155 Stop&Go function 130 Belt carrier 55
Air distribution, Automatic Curb Monitor 59 Belts, safety belts 54
manual 154, 156 Automatic deactivation, Beverage holder, cup
Air flow, air conditioner 153 Front-seat passenger air‐ holder 170
Air flow, automatic climate bags 103 Blinds, sun protection 47
control 156 Automatic headlamp con‐ BMW Assist 6
Air pressure, tires 196 trol 97 BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
Air vents, see Ventilation 157 Automatic locking 44 BMW Homepage 6
Alarm system 45 Automatic recirculated-air BMW Internet page 6
Alarm, unintentional 46 control 156 BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 220
250
Everything from A to Z Reference
Bonus range, ECO PRO 185 Can holder, see Cup hold‐ Cigarette lighter 163
Bottle holder, see Cup hold‐ ers 170 City light braking function
ers 170 Care, displays 241 warning with braking func‐
Brake assistant 124 Care, vehicle 239 tion 114
Brake discs, break-in 176 Care, washing the vehi‐ Cleaning, displays 241
Brake force display 123 cle 238 Climate control 152, 154
Brake lights, adaptive 123 Cargo 179 Clothes hooks 171
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Cargo area, enlarging 166 Coasting 186
play 123 Cargo area, loading 180 Coasting with engine decou‐
Brake pads, break-in 176 Cargo area, storage compart‐ pled, coasting 186
Braking, information 177 ments 171 Coasting with idling en‐
Breakdown assis‐ Cargo, stowing and secur‐ gine 186
tance 231, 232 ing 180 Cockpit 14
Break-in 176 Carpet, care 241 Combination switch, see Turn
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Catalytic converter, see Hot signals 70
play 93 exhaust system 177 Combination switch, see
Bulb replacement 222 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Wiper system 71
Bulb replacement, front 224 ice 220 Comfort Access 38
Bulb replacement, LED head‐ Center armrest 169 COMFORT program, driving
lights 224 Center console 16 dynamics 128
Bulb replacement, rear 225 Central locking system 38 Compartments in the
Bulb replacement, xenon Central screen, see Control doors 169
headlights 224 Display 18 Compass 161
Bulbs and lights 222 Changes, technical, see Own Compressor 204
Button, RES 133 Safety 7 Condensation on win‐
Button, Start/Stop 65 Changing parts 222 dows 156
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Changing wheels 208 Condensation under the vehi‐
ing 232 Changing wheels/tires 202 cle 178
Chassis number, see Vehicle Condition Based Service
C identification number 10 CBS 220
Check Control 81 Configuring driving pro‐
California Proposition 65 Checking the engine oil level gram 128
Warning 8 electronically 214 Confirmation signal 44
Calling up mirror adjust‐ Checking the oil level elec‐ ConnectedDrive 6
ment 45 tronically 214 ConnectedDrive Services 6
Calling up seat adjust‐ Children, seating position 61 Container for washer fluid 73
ment 45 Children, transporting Continued driving with a flat
Camera-based assistance safely 61 tire 107, 110
systems, see Intelligent Child restraint fixing system Control Display 18
Safety 111 LATCH 63 Control Display, settings 92
Camera lenses, care 241 Child restraint system 61 Controller 19
Camera, rearview cam‐ Child restraint systems, Control systems, driving sta‐
era 142 mounting 62 bility 124
Camera, Side View 145 Child seat, mounting 62 Convenient opening with the
Camera, Top View 146 Child seats 61 remote control 35
Chrome parts, care 240 Coolant 218
251
Coolant level 218 Dimmable exterior mirrors 59 Dynamic Stability Control

Coolant temperature 85 Dimmable interior mirror 60 DSC 124
Cooling function 153, 155 Direction indicator, see Turn Dynamic Traction Control
Cooling, maximum 155 signals 70 DTC 125
Cooling system 218 Display, electronic, instru‐
Cornering light 98 ment cluster 80 E
Corrosion on brake discs 178 Display in windshield 94
Cosmetic mirror 163 Display lighting, see Instru‐ ECO PRO 183
Courtesy lamps during un‐ ment lighting 100 ECO PRO, bonus range 185
locking 35 Displays, care 241 ECO PRO display 183
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ Disposal, coolant 219 ECO PRO driving mode 183
cle locked 35 Disposal, vehicle battery 229 ECO PRO driving style analy‐
Cruise control 135 Distance control, see sis 188
Cruise control, active with PDC 138 ECO PRO mode 183
Stop&Go function 130 Distance to destination 91 ECO PRO tips 185
Cruise control with distance Divided screen view, split Efficiency display, ECO
control, see active cruise screen 23 PRO 185
control, ACC 130 Door key, see Remote con‐ EfficientDynamics info 186
Cruise control without dis‐ trol 37 Electronic displays, instru‐
tance control, see cruise Drive-off assistant 128 ment cluster 80
control 135 Drive-off assistant, see Electronic oil measure‐
Cruising range 86 DSC 124 ment 214
Cup holders 170 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ Electronic Stability Program
Current fuel consumption 86 gent Safety 111 ESP, see DSC 124
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Emergency release, fuel filler
D gent Safety 111 flap 193
Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency Request 231
Damage, tires 202 trol 126 Emergency service, see
Damping control, dy‐ Driving instructions, break- Roadside Assistance 232
namic 126 in 176 Emergency unlocking, tail‐
Data, technical 246 Driving instructions, ECO gate 42
Date 93 PRO 185 Emergency unlocking, trans‐
Date display 86 Driving mode 126 mission lock 78
Daytime running lights 98 Driving notes, general 177 Energy Control 86
Defrosting, see defrosting the Driving on racetracks 178 Energy recovery 86
windows 154 Driving stability control sys‐ Engine, automatic Start/Stop
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ tems 124 function 67
frosting 156 Driving style analysis 188 Engine, automatic switch-
Defrosting the windows 154 Driving tips 177 off 67
Dehumidifying, air 153, 155 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine compartment 212
Deleting personal data 24 trol 124 Engine compartment, work‐
Deletion of personal data 24 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ ing in 213
Destination distance 91 trol 125 Engine coolant 218
Digital clock 86 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine idling when driving,
Digital compass 161 trol 126 coasting 186
Dimensions 246 Engine oil 214
252
Engine oil, adding 215 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gear change, Steptronic
Engine oil additives 216 tor TPM 104 transmission 75
Engine oil change 217 Flat tire, warning Gear shift indicator 88
Engine oil filler neck 215 lamp 106, 109 General driving notes 177
Engine oil temperature 85 Flooding 177 Glare shield 163
Engine oil types, alterna‐ Floor carpet, care 241 Glass sunroof, electric 48
tive 216 Floor mats, care 241 Glass sunroof, initialize the
Engine oil types, suitable 216 Fogged up windows 154 system 49
Engine start, jump-start‐ Fold-away position, wiper 73 Glove compartment 168
ing 232 Fold down the rear seat back‐ GPS location, vehicle posi‐
Engine start, see Starting the rest, see Though-loading tion 94
engine 66 system 166 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
Engine stop 67 Foot brake 177 proved 247
Engine temperature 85 Front airbags 101
Entering a vehicle wash 238 Front fog lamps, halogen, H
Equipment, interior 159 bulb replacement 225
Error displays, see Check Front fog lamps, , LED, bulb Handbrake, see parking
Control 81 replacement 225 brake 69
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Front fog lights 99 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
gram, see DSC 124 Front lights 224 nating code 160
Exchanging wheels/tires 202 Front-seat passenger airbags, Hazard warning flashers 231
Exhaust system 177 automatic deactivation 103 Head airbags 101
Exiting a vehicle wash 238 Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlamp control, auto‐
Exterior mirror, automatic indicator lamp 104 matic 97
dimming feature 59 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 109 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
Exterior mirrors 58 Fuel 194 ture 97
External start 232 Fuel cap 192 Headlamps, care 239
External temperature dis‐ Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Headlight flasher 71
play 85 age fuel consumption 91 Headlight glass 223
External temperature warn‐ Fuel filler flap 192 Headlights 224
ing 85 Fuel gauge 85 Head restraints 50
Fuel quality 194 Head restraints, front 56
F Fuel recommendation 194 Head-up Display 94
Fuel, tank capacity 248 Head-up Display, care 241
Failure message, see Check Functions and controls in the Heavy cargo, stowing
Control 81 center console 16 cargo 180
False alarm, see Unintentional Functions and controls in the Height, vehicle 246
alarm 46 cockpit 14 High-beam Assistant 98
Fan, see Air flow 153, 156 Fuse 229 High beams 71
Filler neck for engine oil 215 High beams/low beams, see
Fine wood, care 241 G High-beam Assistant 98
First-aid kit 232 Hills 178
Flat tire, changing Garage door opener, see Uni‐ Hill start assistant, see Drive-
wheels 208 versal Integrated Remote off assistant 128
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 109 Control 159 Holder for beverages 170
Flat tire, repairing 204 Gasoline 194 Homepage 6
253
Hood 213 Integrated key 37 Knee airbag 102

Horn 14 Integrated Owner's Manual in
Hotel function, tailgate 42 the vehicle 29 L
Hot exhaust system 177 Intelligent emergency
HUD Head-up Display 94 call 231 Label on recommended
Hydroplaning 177 Intelligent Safety 111 tires 203
Intended use 7 Lamp in the exterior mirror,
I Intensity, AUTO pro‐ see Active Blind Spot De‐
gram 156 tection 121
Ice warning, see External Interior equipment 159 Lamp replacement 222
temperature warning 85 Interior lights 100 Lamp replacement, front 224
Icy roads, see External tem‐ Interior lights during unlock‐ Lamp replacement, rear 225
perature warning 85 ing 35 Lane departure warning 119
Identification marks, tires 200 Interior lights with the vehicle Lane threshold, warning 119
Identification number, see Ve‐ locked 35 Language on Control Dis‐
hicle identification num‐ Interior mirror, automatic dim‐ play 93
ber 10 ming feature 60 LATCH child restraint fixing
iDrive 18 Interior mirror, compass 161 system 63
Ignition key, see Remote con‐ Interior mirror, manually dim‐ Launch Control 78
trol 37 mable 59 Leather, care 240
Ignition off 65 Interior motion sensor 46 LED light, bulb replace‐
Ignition on 65 Internet page 6 ment 224
Indication of a flat Interval display, service re‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐
tire 106, 109 quirements 87 odes 223
Indicator and alarm lamps, Interval mode 72 Length, vehicle 246
see Check Control 81 In the vicinity of the roof‐ Letters and numbers, enter‐
Indicator lamp, see Check liner 17 ing 25
Control 81 Light 96
Individual air distribu‐ J Light-alloy wheels, care 240
tion 154, 156 Light control 98
Individual settings, see Per‐ Jacking points for the vehicle Light-emitting diodes,
sonal Profile 42 jack 210 LEDs 223
Inflation pressure, tires 196 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Lighting 96
Inflation pressure warning sion 75 Lights and bulbs 222
FTM, tires 109 Jump-starting 232 Light switch 96
Info display, see On-Board Load 180
computer 90 K Loading 179
Information 6 Locking, automatic 44
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Key/remote control 37 Locking, settings 44
tor TPM 105 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Low beams 96
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor cess 38 Low beams, automatic, see
FTM 109 Key Memory, see Personal High-beam Assistant 98
Instrument cluster 80 Profile 42 Lower back support 52
Instrument cluster, electronic Key, see Remote control 34 Luggage rack, see Roof-
displays 80 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ mounted luggage rack 180
Instrument lighting 100 mission 75 Lumbar support 52
254
M Messages, see Check Con‐ Oil filler neck 215

trol 81 Oil types, alternative 216
Maintenance 220 Microfilter 154, 157 Oil types, suitable 216
Maintenance require‐ Minimum tread, tires 202 Old batteries, disposal 229
ments 220 Mirror 58 Onboard computer 90
Maintenance, service require‐ Mirror memory 57 Onboard computer, see On‐
ments 87 Mobile communication devi‐ board computer 90
Maintenance system, ces in the vehicle 177 Onboard monitor, see Control
BMW 220 Mobility System 204 Display 18
Make-up mirror 163 Modifications, technical, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 222
Malfunction displays, see Own Safety 7 Opening and closing 34
Check Control 81 Moisture in headlight 223 Opening the tailgate with no-
Manual air distribu‐ Monitor, see Control Dis‐ touch activation 40
tion 154, 156 play 18 Operating concept, iDrive 18
Manual air flow 153, 156 Mounting of child restraint Optional equipment 7
Manual mode, Steptronic systems 62 Outside air, see Automatic re‐
transmission 76 Multifunction steering wheel, circulated-air control 156
Manual operation, exterior buttons 14 Overheating of engine, see
mirrors 59 Multimedia 6 Coolant temperature 85
Manual operation, fuel filler Own Safety 7
flap 193 N
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ P
tance Control PDC 139 Navigation 6
Manual operation, rearview Neck restraints, front, see Paint, vehicle 239
camera 142 Head restraints 56 Parallel parking assistant 148
Manual operation, Side Neutral cleaner, see Wheel Park Distance Control
View 145 cleaner 240 PDC 138
Manual operation, Top New wheels and tires 202 Parked-car ventilation 157
View 147 Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Manual transmission 74 O tion 178
Marking, run-flat tires 204 Parking aid, see PDC 138
Master key, see Remote con‐ OBD Onboard Diagnosis 221 Parking assistant 148
trol 37 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Parking brake 69
Maximum cooling 155 agnosis 221 Parking lights 96
Maximum speed, display 88 Obstacle marking, rearview Parts and accessories 8
Maximum speed, winter camera 143 Passenger side mirror, tilting
tires 203 Octane rating, see Recom‐ downward 59
Measurement, units of 93 mended fuel grade 195 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
Medical kit 232 Odometer 85 era 143
Memory, seat, mirror 57 Office 6 PDC Park Distance Con‐
Menu in instrument clus‐ Oil 214 trol 138
ter 89 Oil, adding 215 Pedestrian warning with Ap‐
Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Oil additives 216 proach control 117
Menus, see iDrive operating Oil change 217 Personal Profile 42
concept 20 Oil change interval, service Personal Profile, exporting
requirements 87 profiles 43
255
Personal Profile, importing Recirculated-air filter 157 Run-flat tires 204

profiles 43 Recirculated-air
Pinch protection system, mode 153, 156 S
glass sunroof 49 Recommended fuel
Pinch protection system, win‐ grade 195 Safe braking 177
dows 47 Recommended tire Safety belt reminder for driv‐
Plastic, care 241 brands 203 er's seat and front passen‐
Power failure 229 Refueling 192 ger seat 55
Power sunroof, glass 48 Remaining range 86 Safety belts 54
Power windows 46 Remote control/key 37 Safety belts, care 241
Prescribed engine oil Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety systems, airbags 101
types 216 tion 36 Saving fuel 182
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Remote control, opening/ Screen, see Control Dis‐
sure 196 closing 34 play 18
Pressure warning FTM, Remote control, univer‐ Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
tires 109 sal 159 hicle tool kit 222
Profile, see Personal Pro‐ Replacement fuse 229 Sealant 204
file 42 Replacing parts 222 Seat and mirror memory 57
Programmable memory but‐ Replacing wheels/tires 202 Seat belts, see Safety
tons, iDrive 24 Reporting safety malfunc‐ belts 54
Protective function, glass tions 10 Seat heating, front 53
sunroof 49 RES button 133 Seating position for chil‐
Protective function, win‐ RES button, see Active dren 61
dows 47 Cruise Control, ACC 130 Seats 50
Push-and-turn reel, refer to RES button, see Cruise con‐ Securing cargo 180
controller 19 trol 135 Selection list in instrument
Reserve warning, see cluster 89
R Range 86 Selector lever, Steptronic
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor transmission 75
Racetrack operation 178 TPM 105 Sensors, care 241
Radiator fluid 218 Retreaded tires 203 Service and warranty 8
Radio 6 Roadside parking lights 97 Service requirements, Condi‐
Radio-operated key, see Re‐ Roller sunblinds 47 tion Based Service
mote control 37 Rolling code hand-held trans‐ CBS 220
Radio-operated remote con‐ mitter 160 Service requirements, dis‐
trol, opening/closing 34 RON recommended fuel play 87
Radio ready state 65 grade 195 Service, Roadside Assis‐
Rain sensor 72 Roofliner 17 tance 232
Rear lights 228 Roof load capacity 247 Services, ConnectedDrive 6
Rear socket 164 Roof-mounted luggage Servotronic 129
Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ rack 180 SET button, see Active
ment 225 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Cruise Control, ACC 130
Rearview camera 142 ponent, see Run-flat SET button, see Cruise con‐
Rearview mirror 58 tires 204 trol 135
Rear window de‐ Rubber components, Settings, locking/unlock‐
froster 154, 157 care 240 ing 44
256
Settings on Control Dis‐ Status control display, Technical changes, see Own
play 92 tires 105 Safety 7
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Status information, iDrive 23 Technical data 246
ror 57 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Telephone 6
Shift paddles on the steering Steering assistance 129 Temperature, automatic cli‐
wheel 77 Steering wheel, adjusting 60 mate control 153, 155
Side airbags 101 Steering wheel heating 60 Temperature display for ex‐
Side View 144 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ ternal temperature 85
Signaling, horn 14 sion, see Steptronic trans‐ Temperature, engine oil 85
Signals when unlocking 44 mission 75 Terminal, starting aid 233
Sitting safely 50 Steptronic transmission 75 Theft alarm system, see
Size 246 Stopping the engine 67 Alarm system 45
Slide/tilt glass roof 48 Storage compartment in the Thigh support 52
Smallest turning radius 246 rear 170 Through-loading system 166
SMS SMS text message, Storage compartments 168 Tilt alarm sensor 46
supplementary 84 Storage compartments, loca‐ Time 92
Snow chains 208 tions 168 Time of arrival 91
Socket 164 Storage, tires 204 Tire damage 202
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storing the vehicle 242 Tire identification marks 200
nostics 221 Stowing and securing Tire inflation pressure 196
SOS button 231 cargo 180 Tire inflation pressure moni‐
Spare fuse 229 Suitable engine oil types 216 tor, see FTM 109
Speed, average 91 Summer tires, tread 202 Tire Pressure Monitor
Speed Limit Info 88 Sun visor 163 TPM 104
Speed Limit Info, com‐ Supplementary SMS SMS Tire repair kit, see Mobility
puter 91 text message 84 System 204
Speed limits, display 88 Surround View 142 Tires, changing 202
Speed warning 92 Switch for driving dynam‐ Tire sealant, see Mobility
Split screen 23 ics 126 System 204
SPORT+ - program, driving Switch, see Cockpit 14 Tires, everything on wheels
dynamics 127 Symbols 6 and tires 196
Sport displays, torque dis‐ Symbols in the status field 23 Tires, run-flat tires 204
play, performance dis‐ Tire tread 202
play 92 T Tone 6
SPORT program, driving dy‐ Tool 222
namics 127 Tachometer 85 Top View 145
Sport program, transmis‐ Tailgate closing 41 Total vehicle weight 247
sion 76 Tailgate, emergency unlock‐ Touchpad 21
Sport steering, variable 126 ing 42 Towing 234
Stability control systems 124 Tailgate, hotel function 42 Tow-starting 234
Standard equipment 7 Tailgate opening 41 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Start/stop, automatic func‐ Tailgate, opening with no- tor 104
tion 67 touch activation 40 Traction control 125
Start/Stop button 65 Tailgate via remote con‐ TRACTION, driving dynam‐
Starting the engine 66 trol 35 ics 125
Tail lamps 225
257
Transmission lock, electronic Vehicle care products 239 Wheels, changing 202
unlocking 78 Vehicle features and op‐ Wheels, everything on wheels
Transmission, manual trans‐ tions 7 and tires 196
mission 74 Vehicle identification num‐ Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
Transmission, Steptronic ber 10 FTM 109
transmission 75 Vehicle jack 210 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Transporting children Vehicle key, see Remote con‐ tor TPM 104
safely 61 trol 37 Width, vehicle 246
Tread, tires 202 Vehicle paint 239 Window defroster,
Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle position, GPS loca‐ rear 154, 157
tion 70 tion 94 Windows, powered 46
Trip odometer 85 Vehicle storage 242 Windshield washer fluid 73
Trip onboard computer 91 Vehicle wash 238 Windshield washer noz‐
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐ Vehicle, washing 238 zles 73
eter 85 Ventilation 157 Windshield washer sys‐
Turning circle 246 Ventilation, see Parked-car tem 71
Turning radius lines, rearview ventilation 157 Windshield washer system,
camera 143 VIN, see Vehicle identification see Washer/wiper sys‐
Turn signals, operation 70 number 10 tem 71
Voice activation system 26 Windshield wiper, see Wiper
U system 71
W Winter storage, care 242
Unintentional alarm 46 Winter tires, suitable
Units of measurement 93 Warning and indicator lamps, tires 203
Universal remote control 159 see Check Control 81 Winter tires, tread 202
Unlock button, Steptronic Warning displays, see Check Wiper 71
transmission 76 Control 81 Wiper blades, replacing 222
Unlocking, settings 44 Warning lamp in the exterior Wiper fluid 73
Updates made after the edito‐ mirror, see Active Blind Spot Wiper, fold-away position 73
rial deadline 7 Detection 121 Wiper system 71
Upholstery care 240 Warning messages, see Wood, care 241
USB interface, general infor‐ Check Control 81 Word match concept 25
mation 165 Warning triangle 232 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
USB port, see USB inter‐ Warranty 7 tool kit 222
face 165 Washer fluid 73
Use, intended 7 Washer nozzles, wind‐ X
shield 73
V Washer system 71 xDrive 126
Washing the vehicle 238 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
Vanity mirror 163 Water on roads 177 placement 224
Variable sport steering 126 Weights 247
Vehicle battery 228 Welcome lights 97
Vehicle battery, replac‐ Welcome lights during un‐
ing 228 locking 35
Vehicle, break-in 176 Wheel base, vehicle 246
Vehicle care 239 Wheel cleaner 240
258
More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®
01 40 2 973 409 ue
*BL297340900O*

The BMW 4 Series Coupe.: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The BMW 4 Series Coupe.: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The BMW 4 Series Coupe.: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW 4 SERIES COUPE.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 409 - VI/16

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 409 - VI/16

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 409 - VI/16

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 409 - VI/16

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Symbols and displays

Action steps Status of the Owner's

short period of time, typically 30 seconds or Vehicle identification

formation about motor vehicle safety from

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 409 - VI/16

Functions and controls in the cockpit

1 Roller sunblind for rear window 47 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

3 Exterior mirror operation 58 Intelligent Safety 111

Front fog lights 99 Cruise control: resume speed

Light switch 96 Active Cruise Control: reduce

Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase

Parking lights 96 Cruise control rocker switch

Adaptive Light Control 98 Volume, see Owner's Manual for

6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual

Clean the windshield and head‐

11 Start/stop the engine and switch

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

13 Steering wheel heating 60 14 Adjust steering wheel 60

Functions and controls in the center console

1 Control Display 18 9 PDC Park Distance Control 138

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Intelligent emergency call 231 4 Reading lights 100

2 Glass sunroof, electric 48 5 Interior lights 100

3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

Concept 1 Control Display

Safety information General information

2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.

Controller with navigation system Buttons on the controller

1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Phone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Open the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Buttons on the controller

MENU Opens the main menu.

Changing between panels

Press button. Closes current panel and shows previous

▷ The system distinguishes between upper Example: setting the clock

Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on

Display the menu or open Tap once.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours, and Symbol Meaning

SIM card is blocked.

Status field Enter PIN.

Incoming or outgoing call.

Switching the split screen on/off Saving a function